Home

Xpert2 User Manual

1. File Version Xpert 3 2 0 4 Kernel 5 61 08 Monitor 5 1 8 Mon 09 15 2008 14 02 13 60 Loader Fa laes Remote Se 220 4 Xpert exe 3 2 0 4 Windows Engine dl l 2223054 Windows Logger d1 3 2 0 4 Windows LogMgr d1 3 2 0 4 Windows LZO dl1 8220 4 Windows SDI dl1 3 2 0 4 Windows Utils dll 3 2 0 4 Windows Deflib s1l 3 24004 290 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Get Command Example The Get command shows the data logged picking up where the last Get left off or end of log if the first time run Flash Disk gt GET SSP LOG 10 26 2005 13 45 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 13 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 20 G F 10 26 2005 14 00 00 STAGE 1 21 G ft 10 26 2005 14 00 00 AIRTEMP 78 25 GF 10 26 2005 14 15 00 STAGE 1 22 G ft 10 26 2005 14 15 00 AIRTEMP 79 10 G F 10 26 2005 14 30 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 14 30 00 AIRTEMP 79 00 GFE 10 26 2005 14 45 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 14 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 60 GF The following shows the most recent data followed by older data Flash Disk gt GET NEWEST REVERSE SSP
2. 3 00 i T 450 T L o O MODEL SERIAL 32e 4 0 J sss GU GS SESS 8B HN 88S ESS 8 o m a CTU VIEW B B VIEW B B 1 amp 2 ASSY 3 amp 4 ASSY 298 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com XPERT MODEM Dimensions shown are in inches 4 50 MODEL SERIAL Da V4 ae XPERT VOICE MODEM FCC Reg NO 3MUSA J36I8 M5E 8080 0005 E DS j DSR onan POW A AL BLI R WER if Ss c JI 299 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 5600 0600 189 5600 0601 189 5600 0602 189 5600 0603 189 5600 0605 189 56 109 Submersible Pressure Transducer 191 8080 0000 1 5 272 8080 0000 2 5 272 8080 0000 3 5 15 122 272 8080 0001 1 5 272 8080 0001 2 5 8080 0002 1 5 268 8080 0002 4 5 8080 0003 Analog I O Module configuration examples 264 8080 0003 1 5 260 8080 0003 3 5 8080 0005 1 5 273 8080 0006 1 159 8080 0007 Analog I O Module configuration examples 267 8080 0007 1 5 265 A About dialog 69 access levels 18 accounts
3. Add the new measurement interval by clicking the plus sign next to EZSetup Measurements then highlight New Measurement and click EDIT From here all parameters for setting up a schedule are shown For the purpose of this setup the default values already meet the schedule so just click OK Now that the schedule is defined a plus sign appears to show that sensors may be added Click this plus sign to expand the tree then select New Sensor and click EDIT Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Sensor Configuration i Coms Name Level fl E2Setup Measurements S01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 Sensor Quadse x More Cancel New Sensor M Log C Avg DSP New Measurement sat lst E RNE Citre Graphical Setup M l Ta NEF ae 1 0 Modules com C De RE Agis k L Log files value Enno 8 Module 1 7 Satlink z Slope fa Channel 3 z Offset fo Ba For this example select a name Level select the sensor as a QuadSE notice the Log and DSP display on LCD are already checked check the ST to send this sensor in a Self Timed transmission leave default of 2 right digits Since digital channel one on the built in 9210 digital module cannot be used with a Quadrature shaft encoder change the channel to 3 to have a setup that is also 9210
4. eseeserereseseesersreresserersrerernersrererserersrerereresrererseneesserereuseererereeessere 209 ia Measure Measure e E r EER 210 Min Max Minimum Maximum MAMAA oes aa at eraa e nett e aeaa E erae Nea R EE EEE 211 MO AVG Moving Average MovingAverage ccsccscsscessessssseesceseescesecseesecseesecssesscsaecsensecsecsecaeeseesaecsesaeenesaeenaeaeeags 212 x Rr Polyniotiial Poly sect seoreatessstects oiler tenet escctaeau nel Ss ecto EEES nE EEEIEE E EEEIEE EEAS a lt 213 PtCtrl Point Control sses eaea eea eea a en ented ed eet s aE ecole 214 lt Set Point Control SetPoint ccescecsessececseececeessececseaaececseeeeceeseeecsesaececseeeeeesseeeceeaaeeeeseeaeeseseeeeeneaes 216 fox Solar Radiation Accumulator SRACC ccsccecesssccesssececeesnececseceeceesececsesaececseceeeeceeeeceeaeeecnesaeeesseeeeeneaes 217 2 Vector Average VectAy g rde eie pne e pe ees bonseaahed eea See e eo SEN sev ae aE Sa e ESSEE 219 Wave Processor WavProc ssie ab cnncecepebeck vasceedestistece stbceucdsededeesctiueedncatebech abssentiadebectet 221 fej SN AOA seas E EEE E em 226 EOGGNG BLOCKS ornoo ET E AE VA E A O E EE EE a saa E E VS AEOS 221 vii Field Ta ray S07 a Beep are ee ree nr te ee Se ee 229 Rec ETA E E E E E EE ee ees eee 231 TAS Web Eo breser a e a n eea 234 TELEMETRY BLOCKS a r O EA E AEE E a ERE EAR RENERE ERE SER 235 f L Coms Tages eieo oree o E aa VEEE a A AEE A OEA ae area BARR S EE EE 23
5. AGND 4 20ma Current Measurement Example WIRE C VREF Even excitation pair Selected excitation channel 1 20 ohm or 100 completion Selected odd Excitation Channel WIRE Cc Even Channel Pair Selected Channel 1 RESISTOR 2 Selected odd Channel wre L___ sono Four Wire Resistance Measurement Example VREF WIRE EXCITATION CHANNEL 10 Kohm completion CHANNEL Thermistor Two Wire Thermistor Measurement Example AE C REF Even excitation pair Selected excitation channel 1 10 Kohm completion Selected odd Excitation Channel WIRE Even Channel Pair Selected Channel 1 Thermistor Selected odd Channel SDE AGND Four Wire Thermistor Measurement Example 267 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DIGITAL I O MODULE 8080 0002 This section describes the control and operation of the Xpert Digital I O module The Digital I O module has eight digital input lines six of which may be re programmed as outputs The two dedicated input lines can be programmed for normal sensitivity for sensing 0 to 5 volt digital signals or high sensitivity for sensing low level signals such as those from an R M Young wind speed sensor Features Eight digital I O lines CMOS level inputs Six bi directional two input only Reconfigurable I O Up to eight counter
6. SETPIP url Set the PrimaryIP for GPRS connections SETSIP url Set the SecondaryIP for GPRS connections SETMP port Set or show the TCP port to be used for GPRS messages SETCP port Set or show the default TCP port to be used for GPRS command sessions SETRP port Set or show the default TCP port to be used for GPRS Redirector sessions HELP Displays this list STARTUP Runs Xpert exe from the Flash Disk folder if it s there otherwise from the Windows folder Updates the AUTOEXEC BAT if the location has moved STATION name The STATION command will display a station s name Ifa name is passed to the command then the station name will be set and the change will take effect immediately STATUS clear Display and or clear com port status STOP name Stops a process forcibly TASKS Displays tasks and heap usage TIME hh mm ss Displays or sets the time TYPE file C Display a file to the screen If the file is longer than 24 lines the display will pause with a More prompt until enter is 287 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com pressed to continue or anything else to abort e The C option will cause the output to be continuous without pause until the end is reached or ESC is pressed OLDUPGRADE When running Windows Remote exe this command exits and upgrades to a
7. Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MODIFYING A SETUP DIAGRAM Wiring and Unwiring The Xpert will attempt to wire blocks together automatically whenever possible For example if the output of a Measure processing block is selected and then a log block added the system will automatically wire them together However sometimes blocks need to be wired or unwired manually For a simple example of wiring and unwiring let s say we want to change the setup we have built so far to 1 add a solar radiation sensor block and 2 hook its output to the second log block instead of the RMYoung wind direction output First we add a solar radiation sensor using the Add button as explained in the previous section without using the Wizard F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Now we want to unwire the second Measure block To do this first click the RMYoung icon and use Select Output to select the Dir ection output Then click the second Measure block and use Select Input to select Input The Setup Diagram will now look like this with the line connecting the two blocks now in bold Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit MeasureLog D SolRad To unhook these two blocks click the Wire button
8. Returns from a subroutine by branching back after the last Call command If the Call command wasn t used then control passes to the beginning of the phrase Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SpeakAlarms Causes all sensors with an attached ComTag to have their prefix phrase value suffix phrase and alarm status spoken SpeakAllTags Causes all sensors with an attached ComTag to have their prefix phrase value suffix phrase and alarm status spoken SpeakData Speaks just the last measured data value of the specified sensor SpeakLiveData Forces measurement and speaks just the live data value of the specified sensor SpeakLiveTag Forces measurement and speaks the prefix phrase live value suffix phrase and alarm status of the specified sensor SpeakManual Speaks the last data entered by the user with the InputManual command or 0 if no value has been entered SpeakNum Speaks the specified number SpeakPhrase Speaks the specified phrase SpeakTag Speaks the prefix phrase value suffix phrase and alarm status of the specified sensor StoreManual Stores the last data entered by the user with the InputManual command or 0 if no value has been entered in to the specified tag This allows the user to change operating values of the system use WaitForPass to authorize WaitForPass Pauses until the user enters a DTMF sequence which matches
9. Outputs AIOVolt Wiring Connect the voltage output to the analog channel selected CH1 CH6 Connect a ground from the sensor to GND Description VoltMeter is a general purpose block for measuring a voltage from an Analog I O module analog input User selections are available for the I O module and channel analog input warm up time slope offset and reported units The formula for calculating the reading is Output Vin Slope Offset Default units is volts this may be changed to match desired reading I E Degrees C The Settling Time Warm Up can be adjusted to adapt either to long sensor signal settling times or to give the voltage reference in the Analog I O Module a longer time to warm up for increased converting accuracy The block scales the outputs according to the values of S ope and Offset using the equation output reading slope offset The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors page For the calibration the user will enter the current value sensor The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained Voltmeter DC Properties Analog 1 0 Module Channel Settling Time ms Slope base Offset fo Units Volts HiGain 194 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com
10. Reply Delay sec fio Bi Smart Modi mart Modem Ack Delay sec E 2 4200 Baud Retries sec E Slow amp Smart Cancel Below is a description of each option and is the same description provided when the corresponding help button is pressed Carrier Delay seconds When the com port is set for RADIO communications this is how long to key the transmitter assert DTR to warm up the radio before sending data With Sutron radios typically 1 second or less is needed but this may need to be increased if hardware repeaters are used in the network as each hard repeater in the network needs time to warm up Default 1 sec Reply Delay seconds This is how long the XTerm will wait for a reply before timing out This delay includes the time needed for all retries to occur so it s typically set to the value of AckDelay Retries Default 10 seconds 102 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ack Delay seconds This is how long to wait for a response to a message aka an acknowledgement before attempting a retry The default value is 3 seconds which is suitable for a 115 2K baud direct connection 10 seconds is recommended for a single hop 1200 baud system connection It should be increased if lower baud rates or store and forward repeater hops are necessary Retries More precisely this is the total number of tr
11. Vibrating Wire VWire Inputs None Outputs None Wiring One or more Campbell Scientific AVW200 Vibrating Wire Interface devices connected to RS232 com ports See AVW200 documentation for wiring of vibrating wire sensors to it Description The Vibrating Wire block measures vibrating wires connected to one or more Campbell Scientific AVW200 Vibrating Wire Interface devices The AVW200 devices are connected to the logger via RS232 COM port The block does not have any properties to configure in the graphical setup Instead a comma separated value CSV text file is used to define the configuration Here s an example CSV file Name Enabled Y N Time HH MM SS Interval HH MM SS COM Port Channel 1 2 A B C K T0 S0O S1 Name PZ72A Y 0 00 00 000 0 00 05 COM3 1 7 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ72B Y 0 00 01 700 0 00 05 COM3 2 9 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ72C Y 0 00 00 450 0 00 05 COM4 1 7 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ72D Y 0 00 02 150 0 00 05 COM4 2 9 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ74A Y 0 00 00 900 0 00 05 COM7 1 7 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ74B Y 0 00 02 600 0 00 05 COM7 2 9 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ74C Y 0 00 01 350 0 00 05 COM8 1 7 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ76A Y 0 00 03 050 0 00 05 COM8 2 9 019E 08 0 02363 216 921046
12. D aw BEI BEI Absolute Encoder BEIEnc cccccccsssscecsssceceessececeeseeecsnseececsneeecesuececsesaececseseeeesseeecseaeeeeseeaeeess 143 IN Binary Input BININ eiee eson hunieteslecsss steel theses rE EEEE EEE EE EEE anaes 144 Piri Binary Input All Channels BinInAllChan s eseeseeseeeeesesesreresreesesrsrrssrsressesreersseerserrrssesrenresreereseeees 146 O Bridge Resistance Bid B6 s iccscisscsesreshieciesssdessenscisseassctooseusnducssdendneobhsnisssascdenedunsededsenssSeessnecbsceensteegaresndeas 148 6 es CapRain Cap Rain escocesos ee a R ERRE RE EO EEE RE EE 149 1 const Constant Comstlin kerena E E E Hieieieet eee tees ERE 151 CS107 Temperature Sensor CS107Temp eeesseesseseesserssresrsrreresreerestsrrststrsresrentsseerresertrneesrentrsreereserees 155 ea a E a EA A E A E N A D E A E A A 157 Fuel Moisture PM Jyonesnnn a eee Sees cain ee cee Nee ee ee 159 Na Q 2 D gq z Gill cit Gill Wind Gill Wind Semsor c cccecssscecsessececssscececscceceesaeeecesnaeeeceeseceeauececseaaececseeeeceeaeeecsesaeesesenaeeess 161 ee Heat Flux HeatFlux ccccccccccssececsscceceessececseeeececsneeecsssaececseaeececseeeeceesaeeecseeaeeessneeessesaeeecseeaeeeeseeeeeneaes 163 Int rnall Battery IntB at secs cise sceccessecueneessseewsoteesnncnstceseees sanveseotasncesssavysanteescensnsvowecnoseevecsasuspeenbdacdene suey 166 MUG so cee sees sa Sa E oes ewe ss ece cock EE E
13. Edge Both v Filter value booo 5B 145 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Binary Input All Channels BinInAllChan Inputs lt none gt Outputs DIOData Wiring Signal wire to all input channels defined in Bit Selection Channels 1 6 have 100k internal pull up resistors Therefore if open collector outputs are connected to channels 7 or 8 use an external pull up resistor to 5V prot 12 will also work Ground any available ground Description This block reads all bits defined in Bit Selection from a Digital I O module and outputs the binary or gray code value the data represents The block allows the user to select the I O module the number of bits the coding and whether or not the data needs to be inverted All Channel Binary Input Properties vigil yo 2 TI Mode Cancel Graycode Binary E Invert Bit Selection Bits B LSB Channel f The coding options available are Binary and Graycode Binary reads the input channels as binary bits which it then converts to decimal i e LLLL HLHL 0000 1010b 10d Graycode is a coding scheme where each sequential value only differs from its predecessor by one place It is often used by absolute encoders so that slight misalignments between the reading elements will not result in widely incorrect readings Notice for example that an
14. Ex which is always the negative of the current excitation voltage value The excitation channels are shared with the input lines Only one excitation channel can be active at a time The negative of this voltage provided on Ex can be useful in balanced bridge applications to minimize common mode voltage The output SwGnd provides a switched path to ground that when closed grounds through a 100 Ohm resistor The state of this output may be pulsed using the pulse command It may be pulsed open or closed If the output is already in the state that the pulse command requests nothing will happen The ADC device must be in the running state to pulse SwGnd The board must be in the running state to switch the SwBat on This will turn off if the device goes to the off state Analog Measurements The ADC can measure voltages on its terminals and across internal sense elements Sense element voltages allow currents to be calculated by a host processor The ADC can also take paired terminal voltage and sense element voltage measurements that can be used to compute resistance values 262 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The ADC has a built in low pass filter for noise rejection that is programmable for a 10 to 1900 Hz cutoff The filter has notches at multiples of the cutoff frequency The ADC provides for up to 65 535 seconds of sensor warm up d
15. OVERVIEW This chapter will discuss the way in which to create and modify graphical setup blocks Determining when to use the graphical setup versus the Ezsetup measurements is discussed in detail in chapter three but the simple rule is this If the sensor is measured or averaged only then use EzSetup Measurements if additional processing is needed or the data is needed for calculating other parameters use the graphical setup The graphical setup blocks screen is accessed by going into the Setup tab and clicking on either the Graphical Setup tree and clicking EDIT or by selecting one of the graphical sensors under the Graphical Setup tree and clicking EDIT Selecting Graphical Setup and clicking EDIT will show all sensors configured in a graphical manor selecting only one of the graphically setup sensors will show that sensor and all processing related to that sensor only Some users find that viewing the whole Graphical setup can be overwhelming therefore it is recommended to only select create one sensor at a time when setting the system up Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com AN EXAMPLE SETUP DIAGRAM Pressing Edit with the Graphical Setup item highlighted on the Setup tab brings up a screen similar to the one shown below The tabs at the top of the screen have been replaced with the buttons Zoom Wire Add and Exit with the rest of the scr
16. There is no special installation needed for XTerm on a desktop PC Simply copy it to any folder on your PC Always make sure you have the latest version of XTerm which can be downloaded from Sutron s website The version of XTerm on your PC can be found by selecting About XTerm in the XTerm System menu which is accessed by clicking the X in the upper left menu bar XTerm REMOTE Huey Move Size Minimize O Maximize X Close Alt F4 About XTerm f nview Options d To install XTerm on a PocketPC run its installation program from a desktop PC that already has ActiveSync 3 1 installed this is a Microsoft program that is typically supplied by the vender of your PocketPC device and is typically installed as part of the software that comes with the PocketPC At the time of this writing ActiveSync may be downloaded from http www microsoft com mobile pocketpc downloads activesync35 asp When you start XTerm the following screen is displayed to allow you to specify and configure the type of communication link that exists between XTerm and Xpert desktop PC shown left PocketPC shown right 100 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com x Com Pott Baud Rate r Hardware com 115200 z Setup Direct EF xterm Communication 4 3 25 URL or gt C Modem i
17. Xpert Data Logger Operations and Maintenance Manual Part No 8800 1173 Rev 3 18 August 5 2015 Sutron Corporation 22400 Davis Drive Sterling Virginia 20164 TEL 703 406 2800 FAX 703 406 2801 WEB http www sutron com Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION sscsscsssssssscsssnsssssssscesssssescsssnessssnesccssessesssssnsssssnessessessessessessnssnesssssesseseessosenses 1 PRA TURES oe ssvcss spesncesdvscashssvtnes EEEE S EEEE EEE E TO E OO dees 2 CAA EA AET a e RE ET A A AE EEE E EOE EEE 2 PG AtUPES ONERA PAT OE E PETA EET EAEE A E EE E E EEE EE 2 a IE SUBTE I KEE R EE EEE EE EEEE T E O EN 3 EzSetup and Graphical Setup The Key to Flexibility 2 0 cee eeeeeceesceeeceseeesecesecaecsaecnaecaeeeneseaeseaeeeeeeaeeees 3 VO Modules The Key to EX pansion osr 8 ss serscseescetesey dees depecasa cu secsunessicsspsuytesthestedcnas ES eaa Ea pep aea nani 3 DUETS The Key to Modularity r do sscuisestceds cog cvech deface os eree araa r a eeN EES I EEA E EES 3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION sor es ese a areri eneee iaar descencesieeedngeveuhdetssstesd NE ee N apio aane S Nai AENEID AREA NSAR 4 MOES a E n are Re tay tee 5 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED cscssscssssssssssesscsssssescesenessssnessessessesesssnssessnessessessossessessessnessssnessessessoseoses 7 UNPACKING wie scitvessvdies tehstedh eb heb ta EATE E EOE EEE Ea EOE E SEAR EIE ELOS AAEE guasdeuecensuneburendesncvescnedseaigesbovsdunevwesnenenonte uedie
18. gt Exit pel Ed it Edit Properties Select Input gt Select Output gt Clear selection Log Delete Delete Right SolRad Rename To insert a block into a chain of blocks simply select a block for the new block to go in front of So for the example above to insert a display block before the measure of the RMYoung select measure then insert Notice the Input if a block with multiple inputs is selected this would show all available inputs in the case of measure only one input is available so click the Input The Select Category box will be displayed for this example select MISC and then select DISPLAY and click OK F zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit The display is now inserted in front of the measure block Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F Zoom So wie Add gt Exit fas SolRad Log v 4 gt Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CHAPTER 5 EXAMPLE SETUPS EZSETUP FOR A STREAM GAUGING STATION Setting up a stream gauging station with a shaft encoder is simple The following setup will use a 15 minute measurement interval log the data and transmit it to a GOES satellite Connect all equipment before entering the setup For this example setup hook a Satlink to C
19. 115200 8 N 1 and reboot the Xpert You should see the very last line of bootup information showing Launch complete If you do not see this or get any other errors contact customer service for further assistance Adjust the contrast On power up the Xpert starts with the contrast at a fixed value You may change the contrast either at the login screen or at the main tab of the Xpert When the login screen is displayed tapping the touch screen in the upper right corner will darken the contrast while tapping the touch screen in the lower right corner will lighten the contrast Wait at least 2 seconds between each tap to give the display a chance to adjust to the new contrast setting At the main tab of the Xpert you will find a display of the contrast voltage and two buttons to press to adjust the contrast Pressing lt will lighten the contrast and pressing gt will darken it The corresponding voltage will also be displayed Replace the Internal Battery every 5 years DISCONNECT POWER before opening the unit The Xpert has an internal lithium battery to keep the clock running when power is removed This battery should be replaced every 5 years as a preventative measure Typically on a unit that is sitting on the shelf with no power applied the battery will last for 9 years The 5 year recommendation is intended to provide a margin for the worst case situations The battery is a 3 Volt BR2330 type coin cell Upon power up the RT
20. ConstIn Inputs lt none gt Outputs Const Wiring None Description The constant block provides a constant value output This can be valuable for testing setup diagrams before physical sensor are hooked up or in any other situation where a constant output is needed A constant value may be modified via calibration or by setting the value of a connected ComsTag block using telemetry the command line SET command or the Data tab This allows a constant block to be used for manual readings and other purposes Modified values are stored back in to the setup file Constant Properties Constant fo o Read Only Cancel Test Units The Read Only check box may be used to prevent the constant value from being modified by means other than direct modification of the setup The Test check box is used to generate data that varies This can be useful for system tests When Test is checked the data will vary as follows Constant Output 1 TickCount ticks have units of milliseconds not synchronized to any particular time 2 Random Number between 1 and 32767 3 Output increases by 1 151 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 4 Output increases by and delay 500 ms The Units button may be used to define the units for the constant value If Use these units
21. D Solar Radiation SORA isseire eer eiir rires en vienok tiree rer petes t tirenn er rsio iein eee tetet 189 P Submersible Pressure Transducer SubPres ccceccccesssecesesececesseeeeceeaececseeeeeesseeecseaaececseeaeeeeseeeeenenee 191 i Tipping Bucket Sensor Precip ein ineine noes rE E e EOE o Ea KE E Eo E a E a 192 Te VDC Volt Meter VoltMeter c c cccsccsesesesesscecscscsssssececsvsvevsvsvsvsscacacscevsvevsssecavavavavavsvsnsasacacevevsvssessevevavavevevsvenes 194 RWUS Vestine We GU WAHS Sasagawa ees 195 PROCESSING BLOCKS sins csnn dh Sess halen ventana aae cps ames er tect ei eee aa eee pr cen rn oem RR Ean 196 A arin where ote ets eek a a ee 196 S s Accumulator ACCUM E EE E i Let A E A E A 198 n 2 Average AVELABE ocne a E E E cecaeneomtaatab te E sae neeb ENES 199 ee WMH ERICH CITY Secs Suvcicsecodesd snd nuiavsuspbausasedorcuat usta edinbstinssuays dooutcbvinoraesscetwatc visa we daseusedichasl apeannlawenioaeaseons 201 CS S CS625 Water Content Reflectometer CS625WCR cccccccccsssssssssssssssssssesessesesssssssssssesesnesssssseseceesesesesen 202 AA FREQ Dew Point DE WP ineine n E Weaeaca ged ceeed avenue eat salen a A ea ean gab a REEE S vegannea aas 204 BSAP DQAP Quality Controlled Average ccccccseescssesssessescesecseesecseeeeceseeecesecseesecsecsecaaeeeaecaesaecaesaeeeeeeeaaees 205 A LN interpola te nterpolate sanii an aain r a EEE A omnes a E EAE E A ST 207 Georgia Pacific Sampler GPSmpl
22. EXCITATION CHANNEL EVEN CHANNEL Thermistor CHANNEL ODD CHANNEL AGND 3 wire mode Description The Platinum RTD block is used for measuring a 100 ohm platinum temperature devices The dialog allows the selection of the block channel and excitation The type is also selectable between 385 and 392 type devices The resistance at zero degrees can be set for calibration purposes The system will do a differential measurement so always select an odd channel number 13 Sae In 3 wire mode set the Channel to the odd channel e g 1 3 5 and Excitation Ch to the even channel pair e g if Channel is 1 then Excitation Ch is 2 if Channel is 3 then Excitation Ch is 4 etc Note high resolution readings will take longer than non high resolution readings 177 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Platinum RTD Properties AIO module F v Units Type OF 385 Input channel F 7 c O392 Excit channel 3 7 3 wire mode Hi resolution Ohms 0 C 100 amp l i Cancel Note If the Platinum RTD conforms to DIN 43760 IEC 751 or IEC 60751 then select type 385 178 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Quadrature Shaft Encoder Inputs lt none gt Outputs Le
23. Fuel Moisture 159 GetTag 160 Gill Wind 161 Internal Battery 166 167 Platinum RTD 168 169 171 174 177 Quadrature Shaft Encoder 179 R M Young Wind 180 SDI AquaTrak 183 SDI 12 182 SE8500 184 Soil Moisture 163 185 186 188 Solar Radiation 189 Submersible Pressure Transducer 191 Tipping Bucket 192 Volt Meter 194 195 sensor column log file 65 sensors calibrating 60 live measurements 60 properties 60 sending SDI 12 commands 61 viewing 60 62 Set Clock See Also date setting time setting XTerm control 108 Set Field Variables block 248 Set Point Control block 216 SetFieldVar block 248 SetPoint block 216 setup See Also blocks blocks See blocks example 75 modify 85 new 79 setup blocks See blocks Shaft Encoder block 179 SHEF format 50 SLLs 276 Software Development Kit 276 278 Soil Moisture block 163 185 186 188 Solar Radiation Accumulation block 217 Solar Radiation sensor block 189 specifications basic unit with display 272 basic unit without display 272 Digital I O Module 268 PC modules 272 RS232 modules 272 speech Coms Tag block 235 files creating 278 loading 118 introduction 23 modem See modems speech modems SR block 189 SSP 160 235 246 standard deviation 198 199 205 station name XPert 20 Status button 53 54 Status Options dialog 69 STD 198 199 205 Submersible Pressure Transducer block 191 SubPres block 191 suffix 235 Sutron Link Librar
24. INVERT will display all sensors that are not contained in the sensor list e OLDEST will start the dump with the oldest data in the log e NEWEST will start the dump with the newest data in the log especially useful when combined with REVERSE e TODAY will start the dump with today e YESTERDAY will start the dump with yesterday e WEEK will start the dump with the last Sunday e MONTH will start the dump with the Ist of the current month e YEAR will start the dump at Jan 1 of the current year e HOUR will start the dump at the top of the current hour HELP Displays the list of commands INFO Shows the same information as the Xpert s Status Tab IPCONFIG ALL Displays the ethernet configuration information that has been assigned by a connected router via the DHCP protocol including the IP address assigned to the Xpert The ALL option includes more detailed information including the physical address i e MAC ID and DHCP lease times LANOFF Turns OFF the Ethernet Local Area Network interface LANON Turns ON the Ethernet Local Area Network interface DHCP is used to locate the gateway retrieve the IP address and other internet settings Use the IpConfig command to view the current settings Also related Release Renew LOGOUT Logout also quit or exit MAIL port to msg Reads or sends mail message MD dir Make a directory MEASURE Measure works exactly the same as the SHOW
25. LOG 10 26 2005 14 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 60 GF 10 26 2005 14 45 00 STAGE 1 20 ft 10 26 2005 14 30 00 AIRTEMP 79 00 GF 10 26 2005 14 30 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 14 15 00 AIRTEMP 79 10 GF 10 26 2005 14 15 00 STAGE 1 22 G ft 10 26 2005 14 00 00 AIRTEMP 78 25 GF 10 26 2005 14 00 00 STAGE 1 274 G ft 10 26 2005 13 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 20 GE 10 26 2005 13 45 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft The following shows all bad stage data that occurred today Flash Disk gt GET STAGE BAD TODAY SSP LOG 10 26 2005 05 45 00 STAGE O1 B ft 10 26 2005 05 45 00 STAGE 24 B ft The following shows all entries in the system log for the current week Flash Disk gt GET F SYSTEM WEEK SYSTEM LOG 10 23 2005 01 05 05 NOTE Stat User Bob logged in 10 23 2005 01 06 50 NOTE Stat Loaded Flash Disk 543 ssf setup file 10 23 2005 01 05 05 NOTE Stat Running The following sends the last month of AIRTEMP and STAGE data via Ymodem to the PC in CSV format Flash Disk gt GET AIRTEMP STAGE F SSP MONTH CSV YMODEM press ESC to abort Ready to send YModem file s 291 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ymodem all non STAGE data from August ZIP it first to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transferred Flash Disk gt GET STAGE INVERT S 08 01 2005 E 08 31 2005 ZIP Ready to send YModem file s press E
26. Sample Time series data file Name SCRIPPS PIER Station 07301 Channel description SINGLE POINT Deployment latitude 32 52 000 N Deployment longitude 117 15 400 W Water depth cm 680 Sensor elevation from sea floor cm 230 Data type Water column cm Gauge type Sutron Radar Level Recorder Sample rate Hz 1 000 Field software version N A Field station type N A Method of analysis N A Radio modem no Energy basin processing no Surge filter processing no Number of records 2048 Start time 20020201000514 UTC End time 20020201011913 UTC Sample length hh mm ss 00 34 08 483 5 483 5 476 1 467 5 462 7 463 6 462 3 465 3 479 1 484 8 480 9 ATIS 469 2 47361 479 1 474 8 462 3 456 7 458 0 465 7 480 0 489 1 483 5 469 2 459 3 463 1 474 8 485 2 485 6 476 462 7 452 3 454 9 467 9 483 5 482 6 472 2 467 0 472 2 481 7 483 5 483 5 476 1 467 5 462 7 463 6 462 3 465 3 479 1 484 8 480 9 4136 469 2 473 61 479 1 474 8 462 3 456 7 458 0 465 7 480 0 489 1 483 5 469 2 459 3 463 1 474 8 485 2 485 6 476 1 462 7 452 3 454 9 467 9 483 5 482 6 472 2 467 0 472 2 481 7 225 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 2 1 XY Function XYFunct Inputs X Y Outputs Z Description The XY Function block is for doing math between two inputs to produce an output value The two inputs may be
27. Sensor measurements Measurements defined here can be measured or averaged on a regular interval have a slope and offset applied be displayed on the front panel be transmitted via Satlink or modem and be used to identify alarm conditions Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Graphical Setup Used to define both simple and complex measurements Measurements can have one or more inputs cascading into one or more outputs Special processing blocks can be used to implement complex calculations including polynomial interpolation table f x y and others See the Processing section in Appendix A for descriptions of all possible blocks T O Modules Used to view address and serial numbers of I O modules connected to the system The 9210 has three modules built into it AIO1 DIO1 and DSP1 Note If you connect any external I O modules to a 9210 their module number MUST be set to 2 or higher See Naming I O Modules LAN Settings Used to turn on the LAN Ethernet at boot i e when Xpert powers on or automatically when a device is connected Log Files Used to view and define new log files Satlink Used to configure a Sutron Satlink transmitter Self Test Used primarily by the factory for verifying the unit meets specifications Please note that external test harnesses and cables are required for all tests to pass Setup File Used to
28. Sti i SSCid URL selects the IP address of the FTP Server and may optionally contain a URL if DNS is available File selects the name of the file to append the log records and may contain a path ex home loggeddata csv Please note that the file paths on an FTP server typically use the Unix syntax and hence use the forward slash character as shown in the example IP port selects the port number of the FTP Server and is typically 21 User name provides the user name for authenticating with the FTP Server Only simple authentication is supported Password provides the password used for authenticating with the FTP Server Header interval defines how often a header is output in a separate line before the data record 0 for never for every time 2 for ever other time 3 for every third time etc The header describes the contents of the data record As long as the Header Interval is not 0 a new header will be appended after recording has been turned ON to ensure any changes to the setup are reported 232 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When SCKT is checked a TCP IP server will be created that will report the record data to any client that connects to it To select the details press and the Socket Logging Properties dialog will be displayed Socket Logging Properties IP to allow b
29. amp Zonen NR Lite 2 For single ended operation connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect V and V to an adjacent input channel pair e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc and check the Differential checkbox Kipp amp Zonen CNR 2 For single ended operation connect the two V signals to any two input channels CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect NetWaveShort V and V to an adjacent input channel pair and connect NetWaveLong V and V to an adjacent input channel pair an adjacent input channel pair starts with an odd channel e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc Be sure to check the Differential checkbox Kipp amp Zonen CNR 4 For single ended operation connect the four V signals to any four analog input channels CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect Pyrano and Pyrgeo pairs to adjacent input channel pairs an adjacent input channel pair starts with an odd channel e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc Be sure to check the Differential checkbox Connect the V and V thermistor leads similarly V to input channel and V to AGND for single ended V and V to an adjacent input channel pair for differential Connect the heater and ventilator grounds to GND and connect the heater and ventilator leads each to a digital channel output Description The NetRad block is used to measure one of three different ne
30. t wait for confirmation and assumes it has been delivered correctly if the TCPIP stack does not report an error making the connection and sending the message Tx Normal Rate Selects an interval at which a message will be sent when the system is in the NORMAL state entering 00 00 00 will disable this feature Tx Alarm Rate Selects an interval at which a message will be sent when the system is in the ALARM state entering 00 00 00 will disable this feature Send to All If checked messages will be sent to all 3 URLs If left unchecked then each URL is tried in order until a message has been delivered Disable Alerts If checked this will disable alert messages to be sent via TCPIP but not Tx Normal or Tx Alarm messages Alert messages occur when a sensor transitions in to or out of the alarm state Options The options button brings up further options that may be enabled for each URL TCPIP Options 1 User Name MYBASEID We Password peee me fleaye blank if login is not required Port ea Bs default tcp port for telnet servers is 23 User Name SSP alarms may require a user name in order to login to the server before the alarm message can be sent The user name can be specified with this field leave it blank if login is not required Password SSP alarms may require a password in order to login to the server before the alarm message can be sent The password can be specified with this field leave it bl
31. use the stylus and carefully place it in the center of the that appears Hold it for 2 seconds in each spot and then release it The will move to another part of the screen Continue until the prompt tap the screen to save settings appears If you don t want to save the settings wait for the screen to timeout and then start the calibration program again Skip the autoexec bat If a unit does not appear to be running the Xpert app blank screen or communicating with a PC then it is possible that the autoexec bat file has become corrupted or modified incorrectly Follow these steps to skip the autoexec bat file For an Xpert with a LCD display hold the stylus in the center of the touch screen and then apply power Leave the stylus on the touch screen until you see a prompt to skip autoexec bat and then press YES For a non display Xpert connect a PC running a terminal program to COM1 and apply power to the unit After the terminal displays Press Ctrl C to skip execution of Autoexec bat press CTRL key and C lt CTRL C gt hold until message displays Bypassing flash disk Autoexec bat Once the unit has finished booting the autoexec bat file may be retrieved from the unit modified and then transferred back onto the unit Re apply power and let the unit execute the new autoexec bat file to verify it is fixed Unit missing functionality After upgrading a unit if the unit appears to be missing some functionality mi
32. www sutron com DGH sll The purpose of this SLL is to connect any DGH output module typically a 4 20mA or 0 5V to acom port The DGH module simply needs to respond to the following output string 1A0 0yyyy yy followed by a CR Refer to App note 33 for details on use of this block Evapotran sll The purpose of this SLL is to add an Output block to weather stations that will calculate daily potential evapotranspiration ETO GPRS sll This SLL adds support for GPRS cell modem communications both transmissions and incoming message processing GPRS232 sll This SLL provides a general purpose RS 232 communications block intended to enable measurement of a variety of RS 232 sensors IMD sll This SLL implements custom reporting functionality required by IMD TECModbus sll This SLL extends the capabilities of the modbus sll to work with a device built by Applied Systems Engineering to interface to an TEC 104 network Tridium sll This SLL adds support for Iridium cell modem communications both transmissions and incoming message processing LCRAPLCDriver sll The purpose of this SLL is to connect a serial input PLC to one of the COM ports The PLC is used to provide remote output of the headwater and tailwater levels in reservoirs LCRASerialDisplay sll The purpose of this SLL is to connect a two line Adaptive Alpha display to one of the COM ports The purpose of the display is to provide remote out
33. 20 2002 13 17 1 NOSReport sl 12288 12 20 2002 13 17 1 Remote exe 124416 12 20 2002 13 21 2 Config Msi lt DIR gt msdownld tmp lt DIR gt 11 Program Files lt DIR gt 08 RECYCLER lt DIR gt 11 roo lt DIR gt 12 System Volume Information lt DIR gt 10 TEMP lt DIR gt 0 WinCE211 lt DIR gt 05 Windows CE Tools lt DIR gt 05 WINNT lt DIR gt 12 Xpert lt DIR gt 01 _NavCClt Log 4102 08 AUTOEXEC BAT 36 11 BOOT BAK 382 05 lt DIR gt lt DIR gt CONFIG SYS 0 10 10 SYS 0 10 MSDOS SYS 10 RR15 ssf 6835 09 26 2002 13 15 1 NTDETECT COM 34724 111 Satlink sll 134144 12 20 2002 13 17 12 gt 4 gt Get from Xpert Sel All Delete gt lt Run Sel All Delete Run The list on the left top for PocketPC shows the files on your PC The list on the right bottom for PocketPC shows the files on the Xpert You may change the folder that is displayed by simply double clicking on a folder in the window Selecting the control at the top of the window next to the folder name or in the list of files will go to the parent folder All the operations you can perform on the file lists can be selected from the file transfer popup menu shown in the images above This menu is accessed on the desktop PC by right clicking in 106 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 htt
34. 3 RS232 to 115Kbps Internal speaker 4 RS232 1B 8 RS232 2B or 7 RS232 1 RS485 3B USB Host port SD Host slot Packaging 6 x 8 x 2 5 16 aluminum case Weight 21bs Compatibility Y Modem SSP Satlink Environmental 40 to 60C operation Basic Unit without Display 8080 0001 1B The specifications for the basic unit without display is the same as the unit with display except there is no display or touchscreen I C Modules Packaging 4 5 x 4 7 x 1 inches 0 51bs stacking interconnect Connectors I2C bus DB 9 User I O Phoenix Combicon 5 mm x 18 max removable header RS232 Modules Speech Modem A telephone modem expands the system by allowing remote connections to other nodes including a central system The module includes a modem capable of operation at speeds up to 212 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 33 6 kbps This makes it possible for the remote connection to perform all functions as though the module were local to the system such as retrieve data from the memory module live data from any module troubleshoot diagnose configure reconfigure nodes etc Sutron 8080 0005 1 modem includes V 42 and MNP 2 4 and 10 error correction modes as well as V 42bis and MNP 5 data compression The modem is UL CSA FCC and CTR21 approved The Sutron 8080 0005 1 modem has capabilities to support speech The modem accepts DTMF tones to cont
35. 406 2800 http www sutron com Click the plus next to the Satlink tree then select the Self Timed branch and click the EDIT button From here enter all the parameter of the transmission as assigned by NESDIS For this example use a 1 hour rate at a 00 00 00 time offset and send 8 data values Also set the window centering to on and set the window to 15 seconds Self Timed Properties Enable Self Timed V Append Lat Lon Center in Window V Append Quality 7 Channel 151 a Time fo0 00 00 ea Num als E ea Rate 01 00 00 a Format SHEF 7 Window foo 00 15 E Type 300 bps 7 OK Cancel Since this setup is not going to use alarms no more information is needed for the Satlink setup If alarms were to be defined the RANDOM tree would be the place to set that information Measuring a shaft encoder every 15 minute on a fixed interval is easily accomplished using the new EZSetup tree of the SETUP Tab First define the measurement interval then add the sensor and configure it Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Measurement Schedule Coms Measurement Interval foo 15 00 as eg Measurement Time foo 00 00 ii New Measurement L Graphical Setup Sampling Interval 00 00 01 E 1 0 Modules Samples to Average feo as Log files e a L Satlink Measurements per Log p ae Self test M Enable Log ID sis Setup File LakeTop ssf hd
36. 60140 8 5 920s NK EXE 4 807CE FE 2 0 8 703s remote exe 6 20725144 32776 16 5 79s taskman exe 2 0072F94E 816 3 293s xpert exe 12 4070B686 246620 202 440 lt DIR gt 01 23 2003 11 03 32 lt DIR gt 01 23 2003 11 03 32 pert ssf 2474 12 31 1999 21 43 06 gt l SelAl Delete gt lt Run Selai Delete The format of the process information is name threads address size time where name is the file name of the process running threads is the count of threads running address is the where in memory the program is running size is the number of bytes used by the program and time is the amount of CPU time in seconds that the program has used If you double click on any of the processes the system will allow you to select threads or heap A sample thread display is shown below PC Files C WINNT Profiles don Desktop ci Pert Files Process List xpert exe 13 4070B Et lt DIR gt 017 2372003 11 09 32 lt DIR gt lt DIR gt 01 23 2003 11 09 32 lt DIR gt xpert ssf 2474 12 31 1999 21 43 06 T01 C072F0BA 3 0 070s T02 00409752 3 1 658s T03 005E8F1 3 0 959s TO4 6070B856 3 0 005s TOS 004D9B84 3 2 080s TOB 004D9B44 3 1 484s TOF 005E8E34 3 0 003s T08 005ECA46 3 0 162s TOS 405F721E 3 0 339s T10 005F7924 3 0 007s T11 006AC572 3 0 011s T12 60725F7E 3 157 025s gt Set Clock When you press the Set Clock button XTerm prompts Woul
37. 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The WavProc Survey dialog allows you to define installation site specific details These details are included in the input and output data files automatically WayProc Survey Station num 3ch Stream label 2ch Station Latitude 38 996966 Station Longitude 77 424079 Water depth m Sensor depth m Sensor elev m The WavProc Log dialog is used to configure record logging When enabled output data is logged in the following format DateTime RecordID T1 Hm0 Hmax T2 Tp CenterFrequency BandWidth Energy 1 Energy 2 Energy 16 Record Logging M Enable record logging Log Name Flash Disk SSP LOG 7 Record ID wavProc a Cancel Radar configuration The Sutron Radar should be configured for 1 second sampling This can be achieved via the following SDI 12 commands Automeasure interval XXS 1 1 1 Operating mode Average Time and Right Digits XXS 1 3 1 1 7 Sample Form period XXS 1 23 1 To configure the Radar for 1 second sampling by RS 232 issue the following commands Automeasure interval 00 00 01 Operating mode 1 Average time 1 Right Digits 7 Sample form period 1 223 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Radar SDI 12 measurement When using an SDI 12 block to acquire Radar data use an M command to retrieve parameter 1 Be su
38. CH1 CH8 NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION Connect the Thermistor red to GND Do not connect the purple AG to anything Keep it insulated so it will not contact anything Connect the clear shield to GND Description This block measures a CS 107 temperature probe The CS 107 uses a thermistor to measure temperature in air soil or water over the range of 35 to 50C with an accuracy of about 0 5C The Xpert measures the CS107 using its special double voltage reading where it measures its excitation voltage in addition to the signal voltage The nominal excitation voltage is 5 volts After making the measurement the temperature is computed as follows R VM 100000 VX VM Where R is the resistance of the thermistor VM is the measured excitation voltage and VX is the measured signal voltage X 800000 R this converts the resistance to a format compatible with the published conversion polynomial Temp a b X c X d X e X f X Where Temp temperature in degrees Celsius a 53 4601 b 90 807 c 83 257 d 52 283 e 16 723 f 2 211 155 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CS 107 Temperature Analog I O T B Excit Chan F Cancel Meas Chan 2 gt Units F Oc 156 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 htt
39. Current Message that would be transmitted if one were sent by the system Along with the message the dialog displays the number of characters in the message and the amount of time that would be needed to make the transmissions These will be useful things to examine to help make sure the set up is correct To see the detailed status from the transmitter press the Status button Self Timed Test Send Messaqe zi Custom DEFGHIIELMNOPORS TUMA current Message Chars O Secs 0 0 Pressing the Reset button will send a command to the Satlink to reset reboot This might be necessary in the rare case where the Satlink has a problem that can only be cleared by reset but no one is at the station to cycle power To send a Send to Sutron test message press the STS button The following dialog is displayed allowing an STS transmission to be made Satellite ID posse Channel ps Type 300 bps Random Test The Random Test dialog is used to make a test transmission see the selected format of a random transmission and display the detailed status of Satlink Pressing the Send button makes test transmissions Before pressing Send Satlink must be set up with valid information on both the Satlink dialog and Satlink random dialogs Test transmissions should only be made on special test channels or with the Satlink connected to a dummy load Otherwise the transmission may interfere with other stations The test
40. Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LOS Radio SSP RS 485 Settings LOS Radio Settings Tx Normal Rate 00 00 00 m Tx Alarm Rate 00 00 00 iu _ Disable Alerts 00 00 00 will disable a Tx This is the LOS Radio settings screen There are only three settings here The Tx Normal Rate is the rate at which alarms are transmitted when no sensors are in alarm and the Tx Alarm Rate which is the rate used when a sensor is in alarm They can be set to 00 00 00 to inhibit timed alarm transmissions Disable Alerts may be checked to prevent messages to be sent out the port when the system enters the alert state The LOS Radio only supports sending alarms to PC Base Stations using SSP Sutron Standard Protocol The SSP and RS 485 options are very similar to the LOS Radio option The primary difference being that SSP assumes a direct SSP Only serial connection between two devices and RS 485 assumes there is an RS 485 connection The difference is in how the control lines are used but the options are the same Data Modem Settings Ring to Ans Phone 1 Phone 2 Phone 3 a Redial Delay Redials This is the Data Modem settings screen When a alert occurs each phone number is tried in sequence starting with Phone 1 until an acknowledgement occurs Or until the Redials has been attempted on each number The redial delay causes a pause betw
41. Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com R M Young Wind Sensor RMYoung Inputs lt none gt Outputs Speed Dir Wiring Wind Direction AZEXC Connect to selected excitation channel on the analog module Vx NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION AZSIG Connect to selected input channel on the analog module Vi REF Connect to GND Ea EXCITATION CHANNEL Potentiometer CHANNEL AGND Powered Sensors WS Sig connect to selected input channel CH1 CH6 of digital module Note CH7 and CH8 reserved for non powered sensors with low level outputs V Supply connect to VBAT REF connect to GND Non Powered Sensors WS Sig connect to digital CH7 or CH8 of digital module Note The direction potentiometer of most models of the RM Young wind sensor has a 5 degree electrical open from 355 to 360 degrees A one megohm resistor can be placed from the AZSIG input channel to AZEXC excitation channel or AGND to define the direction as 355 degrees AZEXC or 0 degrees AGND in the open region Description This block is designed to make measurements from an R M Young wind sensor models 5103 or 5305 One analog input and one excitation channel analog output is needed on an Analog I O Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com module to determine wind direc
42. Description This block works with reed wetted reed and magnetic tipping buckets The tipping bucket output hooks to one input of a Digital I O module Set Tip to the amount of rainfall associated with one bucket tip The supported Tips are 0 1mm 0 2mm 0 25mm 0 3mm 0 5mm 1 0mm 0 01 and 0 008 Filter can be increased to eliminate extra readings due to bucket bounce however the default value should suffice for most units The output of this block is the total amount of rain that has fallen since sampling began Tipping Bucket Properties Digital 1 0 Module Channel 2 z Cancel Tip fo mm x Reset Filter value Reset The tipping bucket block can reset to 0 0 according to a schedule you specify if desired Press the Reset button to bring up the following dialog to configure the reset Reset Options Reset mode Yearly o Month ho f Cancel Day fi Hour b l l Next reset 10 01 2012 00 00 00 192 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Set Reset mode to either None Yearly Monthly or Daily Set Month Day and Hour to indicate the desired time to reset Month ranges from 1 to 12 Day from 1 to 31 and Hour from 0 to 23 In the example shown above the reset will occur every year at midnight October 1 Note how the next reset is computed shown This can help you figur
43. ETE 299 1X Chapter 1 Introduction FEATURES Sutron s Xpert is designed to be the heart of a wide range of remote monitoring and control systems The Xpert is a highly modular design that is scalable to handle simple to complex requirements Key Features e Intuitive EzSetup and a graphical block oriented setup e Unlimited expansion with I O Modules e Software extensibility with DLL libraries Features USB and SD card support for log memory expansion Multiple independent log files Changes to setup do not affect logged data Modular design you build the logger from modules offered by Sutron Expandable additional modules can be added as needed Scalable handles simple as well as complex sites Low power consumption sleep modes with low quiescent power low operating power Battery operated each module operates off of 9 5 to 16 VDC Wide temperature operation 40 to 60C High reliability and robust no fuses fault tolerant lightning protection Multiple telemetry can add telephone LOS Radio GOES METOESAT telemetry Plug n play ease of setup the system is setup with ease Install a new module and the system automatically detects it and allows it to be configured for operation e Flexible measuring and recording The setup allows separate measuring schedules for data as well as individual recording intervals Open design the system will operate with sensors and modules
44. IN 9 Set by jumpers to RI 5V or 12V COM9 on 8080 0000 3B DTE Male DTE Signal Name Comments 1 NC 2 RS 485B Idles Low Standard nomenclature this would be A 3 RS 485A Idles High Standard nomenclature this would be B NC GND NC NC NC SOI S 9 Na A Set by jumpers on J4 to NC NC is configured by 5V or 12V selecting RI Note The Xpert provides a very weak bias to maintain the idle condition If the connecting device is expecting strong bus biasing then external biasing resistors can be added One resistor between the COM9 pin 2 signal and ground with a second resistor between COM9 pin 3 signal and either 5 or 12V For mild biasing use 100K resistors For much stronger biasing use 10K resistors 122 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Jumper Settings The following table gives the jumper settings and their default settings To change the default settings open the Xpert and change these jumpers COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 Configuration J800 J900 J901 J1000 Jumper connector Default Ring in Ring in 5V Switched Ring in configuration for Pin 9 Configuration Jumpers 5V SW D 12V SW D 5V In the switched configuration power is turned on when the port is opened and turned off when the port is closed 123 Bring
45. Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Start log toend time When this option is selected the system exports only the data that has a timestamp between the start of the log and the time specified in End Time If you are using XTerm and press Export the software will automatically transfer the file to your PC without creating a copy of the file on the Xpert Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com STATUS TAB The status tab displays detailed status information from the Xpert The data displayed includes the status on each I2C module any communication modules and the system in general To update the status menu press the Refresh button Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Recent Status 10 18 08 59 Stat User Anonymous logged 10 18 08 59 Stat Running 10 18 08 59 Stat Self test Nothing to do 10 18 08 59 Stat Com Status Waiting 10 18 08 59 Stat Com Status Started Com Status Waiting Select the Options button to access status reporting options The Status Options allows the user to configure where status and debug messages should be sent Note that status messages are automatically stored in the system log Status Options Send status messages to COML V Send debug messages to COML _ Send debug messages to system log Cancel To access t
46. The NOS format doesn t use Num Values at all When INSAT is the selected format then when Num Values is greater than 1 previous data is placed into the positions of subsequent ids For example when sensor id 2 has a Num Values of 3 the most recent value is transmitted as id 2 the next most recent value is transmitted as id 3 and the next most recent value is transmitted as id 4 Note how this precludes having sensor ids 3 and 4 defined in the setup If a multiple position id e g R356 is encountered with Num Values greater than 1 the values are repeated only within the first frame of the message and only so many times as to ensure complete entries an orphaned integer entry will not occur Sequence Sequence is used by the SHEF SHEFFIX BIN INT and BIN NONINT formats to define the order of the sensors in the message It is not used by the NOS and INSAT formats as these have a fixed sequence Use Calc Time The Use Calc Time checkbox is used to specify that the input data s actual time of calculation should be used for all formatting considerations and not the data s scheduled time This option is available only when SHEF or SHEFFIX is the current format Using the calculated time is useful when the input data is a min or max point from the min max block When this is the case the data point will be collected regardless of the offset and interval property values and will be formatted with its own label offset and inte
47. The Xpert Software Development Kit SDK enables developers to create Sutron Link Libraries SLLs that extend Xpert s functionality according to the developer s unique needs The SDK is most often used to create libraries containing custom setup blocks property pages tabs on the main screen and control panel entries branches in the tree under the Setup tab but may also be used to create libraries that manipulate ports files peripherals and any other entity accessible through standard Windows CE operating system API calls The SDK is may be downloaded from Sutron s website at http www sutron com DownloadsUpdates XpertSDK htm The SDK is intended for use with Microsoft eMbedded Visual Tools EVT 3 0 which at the time of this writing is available at no charge from Microsoft This toolset contains the compiler linker and operating system libraries necessary to develop for the Xpert platform It may be ordered on CD from Microsoft in which case a modest shipping charge applies or downloaded from http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID F663BF48 3 IEE 4CBE AAC5 QAFFD5FB27DD amp displaylang en Sutron assumes that any developer using the tools is already knowledgeable concerning C and basic Windows programming Please note that custom SLLs must be rebuilt compiled and linked using EVT 3 0 whenever you upgrade to a new version of Xpert firmware This must be done with the version of the SDK that matc
48. WTDIN M module The WTDIN M module is capable of tracking quadrature at much faster rates than the normal Quad block in the Xpert A single QuadW block reads all four channels of the Weeder Tech module The WTDIN M will retain its measurement of position until power is removed For more information see the document Xpert QuadW SLL User Manual doc available separately RDI sll This SLL Implements RDI protocol Relay sll This SLL contains a block intended to control a relay The block will set a digital output for a specified time duration and then clear the output RS485SDLsll This SLL enables SDI over an installed RS485 com port if any Xperts may be ordered upgraded to support RS485 via a change to internal hardware 9210s normally support RS485 on COM4 and may also have internal hardware change for other ports NOTE for more information on using SDI 12 over RS485 see the 9210B user manual discussion of this SLL SR50 sll This SLL enables measurement of SR50 ultrasonic height gauge SRP sll This SLL works with the 9210 only prompting the user to download data after inserting a storage card TerminalServer sll This SLL adds commands to the remote command line interface based on the user login UWAPL sll This SLL adds custom blocks and telemetry processing for specific customer system performing wave analysis Sensors used Nortek AquaDopp AirMar PB200 Microstrain 3DM GX3
49. XTerm on its COM1 serial port at 115 200 baud Connect a standard M F DB9 cable between the PC and the Xpert A M M gender changer and a Null Modem are necessary to connect Xpert to the PocketPC The program in the Xpert responsible for communicating with XTerm is remote exe When the Xpert starts up it will first check for an autoexec bat file in the flash disk folder If the file is not there factory default condition the system will automatically run remote exe on com1 However if the file is there the system will execute the contents of autoexec bat In this case remote exe is run only if there is a line in the file to run it In the event that a system has an autoexec bat file that does not run remote exe and you want to run it reset the Xpert and hold a stylus on the touch screen while it starts When your touch is detected the system will prompt you to see if you desire to bypass the autoexec bat Select YES and the Xpert will bypass autoexec bat and run remote exe on com1 Operating XTerm When XTerm runs and communicates with an Xpert that has user accounts setup you are required to enter a username and password to gain access When this happens simply enter a valid username and password When XTerm starts you will see a dialog similar to the one below The left portion of the desktop window shows the contents of the Xpert display The entire screen of the PocketPC display shows the Xpert display When you click or tap in the
50. Xpert the desired speech files The speech files take up considerable space on the flash disk Therefore you will only want to send to the Xpert the files you expect to need The speech files are found on the CDROM provided by Sutron with the Xpert The speech files can also be downloaded from the Sutron web site On the CDROM files in the main ENGLISH folder are essential for basic speech operation Files in the ENGLISH EXTRA should only be loaded as needed Use XTerm to transfer the files to the appropriate folder in the flash disk speech English Spanish etc If the folders Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 11 12 13 14 15 16 do not exist in the Xpert use HyperTerminal and issue the MD command to create the desired folders If you want to create your own speech files refer to the procedure given in Appendix F If you have a setup file s for the Xpert default ssf or anyname ssf use XTerm to load them into the flash disk When the Xpert starts it will first try to load a setup file that matches the station name If it doesn t exist the Xpert will try to load a setup file named default ssf If you don t have a setup file you will need to create one See Chapter 4 for details After creating the file save it with the name that matches the station name station_name sff or default ssf if you want it to be used at start
51. a single hop 1200 baud system It may be reduced if higher baud rates are available or increased if store and forward repeater hops are necessary Retries More precisely this is the total number of tries When an SSP request is made that requires a reply such as a GetTag the system will wait for the Ack Delay for the reply If a reply is not received then one or more retries is performed Retries is the total number of attempts to make The default value is 3 Combined with the default Ack Delay of 10 seconds this means SSP will send the same message as many as 3 times with a 10 second delay between each attempt before it will timeout and report a tx error All retry messages have the same FLAG SEQUENCE number as the original message This is used to prevent the same message from being processed twice due to a long network delay Reply Delay When the Xpert is acting as a slave this is how long the RTU will wait for a message before timing out This delay includes the time needed for all retries to occur so it s typically set to the value of AckDelay Retries The only situation where the Xpert acts as a slave currently is when it s receiving a new setup from a base station The Basic GetMessage function may be used to add slave operations to the Xpert but the timeout value is specified as a parameter to the function Retry Delay This parameter is rarely used in the software and inserts an extra delay before attempting a retry
52. and is hence redundant with the AckDelay Recommendation is to just leave it set to 0 TCPIP Alarm Setup Menu Pressing the TCPIP button displays the TCPIP Alarm Setup menu requires V3 2 of the Xpert application or later This menu allows alert and or alarm messages to be configured to be sent to a base station over the LAN connection The messages may be in SSP format or text format Each URL is attempted in order 1 then 2 then 3 until the message has been successfully delivered unless Send to All is enabled As long as alerts are not disabled when an alert occurs TCPIP delivery will be attempted first before other communication methods TCPIP Alarm Setup URL Type 1 pconnect2 ssp options 2 fiz7voo1 e fear Compute options 3 myorg gov Ea Daa options Tx Normal Rate fo2 00 00 Bi Send to alll Tx Alarm Rate fo0 20 00 Lal _ Disable Alerts 00 00 00 will disable a Tx OK Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com URL Machine name or IP address to send a message to Leaving an entry blank will cause it to be skipped Type Type of message to send SSP selects an SSP message The Xpert2 waits for an OpAck packet to be received to confirm reception Computer selects a text message with a prompt to press ENTER to confirm reception Data also selects a text message but it doesn
53. at the top of the screen The blocks unwired will look like this F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit MeasureLog D SolRad To now hook the measure and log blocks to the new SR sensor we have added click on the SR icon and use Select Output to select its output SR zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit RM Youn MeasureLog Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Finally click the Wire button again to get the desired setup F zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit Pheng RM Youn MeasureLog Deleting a Block To delete a block select it and then select Delete from the menu that appears This also deletes the wires coming from that block For example if we deleted the second Measure block from above the resulting Setup Diagram would then look like this F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Pheng RM Youn MeasureLog Deleting Multiple Blocks To delete multiple blocks click on the left most block then select the Delete Right menu All blocks to the right of the selected block will be deleted In the above blocks clicking RMYoung and selecting Delete Right will delete the RMYoung Measure and Log with one click Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Insert A Block Dg wire Add
54. can select one of the allowed formats including SHEF SHEFFIX BIN INT BIN NONINT NOS NFDRS and INSAT The transmission routines use this selected format and the information in this block to properly format the data Self Timed Properties Label JAT fa Data Time 00 00 00 poor00 Data Interval 00 01 00 Num Values f Sequence f Jse calc time Label The Label field has multiple uses depending on the transmission format selected For SHEF and SHEFFIX formats the value for label is included in the transmission as the sensor ID for the value The common SHEF IDs are normally simple two letter codes for each sensor such as GH for gauge height PR for precipitation and so on For BIN INT and BIN NONINT formats Label is ignored as sensor labels are not included in these format transmissions For NOS the label is used to identify to the formatter the different sensors that must be included in the message You must put the proper labels for each sensor or the formatter will not be able to locate the sensor to transmit it The labels are as follows Station Datum DAT 239 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Sensor offset SNS Primary water level WL Aquatrak sigma SIG Aquatrak outlier cnt OUT Aquatrak temp 1 AQT1 Aquatrak temp 2 AQT2 Wind speed WS Wind direction WD Wind gust GST Air temperature AT Water
55. case of the PocketPC in the Xpert portion of the display the Xpert will respond as if you had used the touch screen on the Xpert itself The only exception to this is on the PocketPC when you tap and hold the stylus against the screen for a few seconds XTerm s main menu is displayed The options on this menu are the same as those provided by the buttons on the right hand side of the desktop version 104 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com xi Re Tx Xp C En File Transfer f j Set Clock Retrieval Access for data retrieval l Grey Upgrade Setup Access for station setup Status Select type of access lV Web Server IV Auto Update If the screen is blank or becomes unreadable or garbled right click in the Xpert display area This sends a command to the Xpert retrieve again the contents of the display To do this on the PocketPC tap and hold the stylus on the screen to access the main menu and then select Update Now Note that while you operate Xpert from XTerm the Xpert s physical display if it has one will also be changing If someone is looking at the screen while you are operating the Xpert they will see all that you are doing Both the touch screen and PC are active at the same time with the same priority so don t try to work on the Xpert at the same time XTerm is very smart when it come
56. command except it causes a live reading of the sensor values to be taken before the results are displayed 284 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MEM Display memory usage PASSTHRU Opens the specified port either unopened or under the control port parity bits stop of remote where port can be COM2 or VOICE3 or SSP2 HW ECHO depending on how the port is configured For generic serial BREAK CONTROL ports use COM and the port number If the port is in use by other sll ports GPRS iridium etc the port must first be disabled then re enabled when finished Any characters typed are sent to the port Any characters received are displayed Terminate with by pressing ESC three times in a row e The HW option enables RTS CTS h w handshaking e The ECHO option causes the characters you type to be echoed back which can be useful when communicating with half duplex devices e The BREAK option will send a 500ms break to the serial port after connecting This may be used to wakeup sensors which require a break e The CONTROL option added in version 3 4 allows the DTR control line to be passed through This used to be the default behavior but as of 3 4 dropping DTR or disconnecting will cause a logout to occur The normal user inactivity timeout will be applied to passthru sessions Note If using passth
57. communications The crossover cable allows you to connect the Xpert directly to a PC or laptop without the need for a router between the two This cable can be purchased most anywhere standard ethernet cables can be purchased When using a crossover cable set the LAN Configuration either to On or to Auto As mentioned above Auto will turn the LAN on and off automatically according to whether there is something connected to the ethernet jack Since there s no router in a crossover connection it s best to assign a static IP If you don t the Xpert will still assign a default IP that Xterm can find and use but the connection process occurs more slowly Log Files The Log Files branch of the Setup tab allows management of all the log files that have been added to the system Multiple log files can be stored in physical memory space only limited by the amount of memory in the system Multiple files can be open at one time therefore ten sensor signals can be logging to ten separate files or to five files or one for that matter To display a more detailed listing of the log files in the system click Log files and then press the Edit button at the bottom of the screen Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Log files Flash Disk segar log 49920 Yes Flash Disk log log 65536 Yes Log Properties For each log file this wind
58. compatible Note If an external 8080 0002 were used with the 9210 then channel would be valid H Click the MORE button to get to the details of the QuadSE properties See Appendix A to see all the options available for this built in sensor block For this setup leave the defaults Click the DSP button to see the properties for the display It is possible to log a different amount of precision than is displayed on the front panel the default value used here comes from the Rt Digits set on the main Sensor Configuration page For this setup leave the defaults Click the ST button to see the properties for the self timed transmission Notice that all the fields are filled in with details previously entered These details include the Label From Sensor Configuration Data Time Interval From the EZSetup Measurement schedule Num Values From the Self Timed tree under Satlink and an auto numbering Sequence This is the first sensor configured so it is 1 Since the transmit format was previously left at the default of SHEF the Num Values for this sensor are configured here it is possible to send a different amount of values per sensor Had BIN INT binary interleaved been selected this field would display the Num Values set in the Self Timed setup under Satlink tree but will not allow it to be changed from this properties page For this setup leave the defaults Self Timed Properties Label Level Dat
59. dues een eanree tae ea ieee aetoines 167 DeltaT ML2x ML2x Soil Moisture Sensor ML2X ccccescccesssececsscceceesececeessececeeneecessaeeecsesaeceeseeeeeesseeecseaeesensnaeeess 168 MRL 766 MRL 700 Radar Sensor MRL700 0 cccccccecssscesscecssecseececsseceeeeecsaecseeecsaeceeeecsueceseeeesaeeeeeesesseceeeeesaeene 169 SENR D Net Radiometer Sensors N tRad cc0 scecn aces non nE EE EEEE cen ee eek 171 ar Airmar PB200 200WX PB200 rrsan eieiaeo as a a R a a a tS EE 174 PT S kTb Platintim RTD Plat RTD oeiee siris ranner aE anes sasvadetesd ten SETE Eee eaS eaS R ESES 177 Quadrature Shaft Encoder cccccccccceessscecssssececseeeececseeeeceeaeeecsenaececeeeeceeaececseaaececseeeeceeaeeeeseaeesesnnaeeess 179 R M Young Wind Sensor RMYoung eesssesssseesesreesesrerreesresrrsterrsrrrrsrertestnsteetrsretinsentestnsreetesreeresenten 180 SD E e E E a E E 182 SDE Aquatrak gt SDIAQUA sscscscestescadeiicssacteceventtdncasisles eavatedessvestenessnbbceusensctyeseesblsdscasteossensadasaveetsoavabeanes 183 SE8300 SESS00 is csccaicaee suche los eE E AEE EE TEETE ENEE E E ENEE EA EE EEE TEE 184 A Send Current Time Send Time ic nurnerr E a E E E E AER EEEa 185 TH Soil Moist te Sot ccscsssciscccesdensicasadeieycecdeceaeieddonccdecco essedidvscsddecsuesvbesoessdie obtaghdedenusieessdessdsieveeddvesansbbees 186 Gi Soil Temperature Sol Temp sescent ieies eneen nEs Ee EE EEEE ESEE EEE EEEE EES EEE 188 amp
60. ecah i C Radio Port S00 Baud To i C TCPIP URL localhos TELNET Hardware z PC To Fom C Redirector Direct User Name from O iiri 640x480 Name Rado P d A TCPIP i Telnet Port Password Telnet Phone z E Phone Sample Command Line Create Desktop Shortcut TelPort pb Term COM1 115200 f Exit OOo RN Use the controls on the screen to select the com port baud rate type of connection direct modem radio TCP IP Telnet 640X480 big screen mode when selected and related values Setup is an advanced option that allows the SSP timings to be modified to accommodate different types of connections Select OK and XTerm will begin operation with the type of communications you have selected Connection types are as follows Direct Serial cable from Xpert to PC Modem Allows XTerm to dial out on a pc modem to a Xpert with modem Radio Allows XTerm to control a line of site radio to talk to a Xpert TCP IP Allows XTerm to communicate with a networked Xpert2 If the Xpert2 is connected to a firewall and TCP IP access is desired than the firewall must be configured such that connections on TCP port 52733 will be allowed to the Xpert2 This option may also be used to connect to an Xpert indirectly through another copy of Xterm running on a PC at the IP address specified Useful to assist other users since all actions performed on remote pc are viewed at the pc connected to the Xpert 9210 e Teln
61. from a single block or from two different blocks To use a constant in an equation for example to perform x 4 use the output from a Constant sensor block as one of the inputs The Units button should be used to tell the system what units to label the output values with If x and y inputs have the same units these units will be retained through to the output Block Placement XYFunct output should be connected to the input of a measure or other scheduled block If you were to connect it after a measure multiple entries would go into the log and the most current data would not be used for both X and Y inputs By placing the measure onto the output the system will get input data at the same time from both inputs XY Function AA x ad Func Measurelog Units SE8500 226 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LOGGING BLOCKS Log Inputs Input Outputs Output Description This block is used to funnel a data stream into a log file Generally one log block is needed for each signal of each sensor that needs to be logged For example if temperature and humidity from a AT RH block needs to be logged one log block is needed for each The different log blocks in the system can log to the same log file different log files or anything in between Log Properties Log Name Flash DiskSSP LOG x Sen
62. in CSV format Date time edge detected function splcnt ph1 tl ph2 t2 Example 08 27 02 14 03 10 GPSmpl 1 125 5 62 25 19 9 73 28 81 Use 2 right digits for ph1 tl ph2 and t2 If the file does not exist because a new card has been inserted create it If there is a problem creating opening or writing to the file send a warning message to the report warning If the digital input stays at high 1 for more than 5 minutes write a warning message to the report warning Init splcnt to O when recording is turned on GPSmpl Properties Time 00 00 00 Interval 0 00 05 ws Delay s oO File cPlog csv fa HHH 209 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ha Measure Measure Inputs Input Outputs Output Description Measure blocks are used to create a sampling schedule for sensor blocks The only time a Measure block or similar is not needed after a sensor block is when the sensor block is set to output data based on a specified change on the sensor input Event mode Enter values for the Time and the Interval The interval is how often the data from the sensor should be sampled The time is a synchronization time not an start time In the example below the sensor will be sampled every fifteen minutes synchronized to the hour If Time had been set to 00 01 00 the sensor would be sampled every fifteen
63. in the cable you connect to provide the Xpert with power This fuse should be rated for at least 2 amps 130 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix A Setup Blocks INTRODUCTION The power of the Xpert is in its setup blocks These blocks do the work of measuring processing logging and telemetry Sutron will regularly develop new setup blocks to provide an expanding support for new sensors and updated processing Customers will also be able to create setup blocks using optional software available from Sutron Following is a list of setup blocks that are provided with the system The blocks are grouped as sensor blocks processing blocks log blocks telemetry blocks control blocks and miscellaneous blocks Whenever connections to ground or to an excitation are shown in the connection drawings for analog measurements these connections are expected to be made to the appropriate points on the module performing the analog measurement not to a similarly named pin on a different module Note Analog connections are shown for the 8080 0003 AIO module The 8080 0003 has the capability of providing excitation out of any of the analog channels The 8080 0003 module also has built in current sensing resistors to eliminate the need for external resistors in most configurations This differs from the 8080 0007 AIO module which has a fixed Vref termi
64. increase from 3 to 4 causes two bits to change in binary but only one in Graycode Decimal Binary Graycode 0 000 000 1 001 001 2 010 oll 3 011 010 4 100 110 146 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 5 101 111 6 110 101 7 111 100 The Bits value defines how many bits to convert from six to eight If less than eight bits are being converted then set LSB Channel to the channel of the least significant bit 147 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Bridge Resistance Bridge Inputs lt none gt Outputs Output Wiring Wire to the Xpert as shown below NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION VX VI VI GND Description This block reads a bridge type resistance sensor These sensors typically require an excitation of 2 to 5 volts and a full scale output of 10 to 100 mV To make this measurement the Xpert makes a single ended measurement of the reference voltage and a differential measurement of the input voltage The equation applied to the measured voltages is as follows Output Slope Vi Vx Offset The user set properties of the Bridge block are shown below Note that the input is a differential measurement so select an odd numbered input channel
65. is checked then the text entered below it is used as the units for the constant block otherwise the units are passed on to the next block as blank 152 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Counter Counter Inputs lt none gt Outputs Count DeltaCount Freq Wiring Connect the device to the selected digital input Description The Counter block is a general purpose block for measuring a counter or frequency input Each time the block is run it collects counter information from the digital I O module and then computes a delta count and frequency from the data collected the last time the block was run As a result the first time this block is run the frequency and delta count output will not have valid data Filter is used to debounce noisy inputs Most mechanical switches like a tipping bucket output have noise so a filter should be used with switches A value of 0 specifies no debouncing while a value of 1 to 255 requires the input to remain high for filter_value 0 2 ms in order for the system to register a count Along with computing the deltacounts and frequency the block also scales the outputs according to the values of Slope and Offset The units for the outputs are forced to be Hz for Freq and CNT for Count and DeltaCount whenever the units are set to Hz The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Uni
66. is not checked the actual time the value is computed is displayed normally these times are the same they may differ when measurement delays occur due to loading and or other factors P zoom Bg wire F Add gt Exit cong WebLog Properties Sensor Name Stage bal Precision right digits k Log scheduled time V 234 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com TELEMETRY BLOCKS Coms Tag Inputs Data Outputs Data Description This block identifies or tags data to be shown on the Data tab If the block is connected to an Alarm block the Data tab will show alarm information for the tagged data point The Coms Tag block also tags information to be included in SSP communications messages When another station requests current data alarm data get tag send tag or eval tag these are common SSP requests the Xpert provides the data from the Coms tags Therefore you control the data that is included in the responses to these data requests by attaching a Coms tag to the desired data NOTE This tag is case sensitive therefore it should always be entered in UPPERCASE letters to avoid confusion The Prefix and Suffix phrases are only used in speech voice modem messages If you do not see choices for the prefix and suffix the speech files have not been loaded into your Xpe
67. ka a teense cove daa miaa aaia aa Invert output The Operation property can be set to one of AND OR or XOR The table below defines the output given all the possible different inputs and operations Inputs Output X Y AND OR XOR true true true true false true false false true true false true false true true false false false false false When the Invert Output check box is selected the outputs shown in the table are inverted Block Placement The Boolean block should typically come BEFORE the measure or average or other active block that executes it This ensures the block operates on data from the same measurement frame and avoids odd side effects that come from active blocks operating on split paths 201 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CS CS625 Water Content Reflectometer CS625WCR Inputs Frequency Freq Soil Temperature C SoilTemp Outputs Volumetric Water Content VWC Description This block is used to compute Volumetric Water Content VWC using a CS625 Water Content Reflectometer sensor Wiring The CS625 sensor s output should be wired to the input of the 6461 1285 frequency divider The output of the divider should be connected to the input of the DIO module A Frequency block is used to measure the input f
68. managing 57 overview 18 users dat 118 accuracy Analog I O module 263 ADC block 135 40 Air Temperature sensor block 133 Air Temperature Relative Humidity sensor block 135 Alarm block 23 196 alarms block 196 Index configuring 23 40 51 52 160 196 235 236 246 Digital I O Module features 268 alerts 23 40 Analog block 135 40 Analog I O Module accuracy 263 inputs 262 measurements 262 operational states 262 outputs 262 plug assignments 260 265 appending random transmissions 51 self timed transmissions 49 Aquatrak block 183 AT RH block 135 Auto Update 109 autoexec bat 128 280 Average Block 199 205 B bad data quality 66 Barometric Pressure sensor block 142 battery Internal Battery block 166 167 replacing 129 BEIEnc block 143 Bin_Int format 50 52 Bin_NonInt format 50 52 Binary Input All Channels block 146 Binary Input block 144 binary input mode 146 Binary Out block 244 245 BinIn block 144 BinInAllChan block 146 BinOut block 244 245 blocks adding 79 82 categories 75 connecting 76 control blocks See control blocks deleting 87 inputs and outputs 75 301 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com log blocks See log blocks See log blocks See log blocks miscellaneous blocks See miscellaneous blocks overview 3 processing blocks See processing blocks prope
69. message that will be sent is displayed in the text box to the left of the send button Change the message by selecting custom and then changing the message using the control Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com If the setup has been entered this dialog will display the Current Message that would be transmitted if a random message were sent Use the control next to Group to select which random group to see formatted Along with the message the dialog displays the number of characters in the message and the amount of time that would be needed to make the transmissions These will be useful things to examine to help make sure the set up is correct To see the detailed status from the transmitter press the Status button Pressing the Reset button will send a command to the Satlink to reset reboot This might be necessary in the rare case where the Satlink has a problem that can only be cleared by reset but no one is at the station to cycle power Random Test CDEFGHIIELMNOPORS TIVAR YZ current Message The setup does not define a message for the 4 gt Group 2 fil Chars O Secs 0 0 Satlink Status Satlink keeps a detailed status of its present and past operations The Xpert will display this information in the Satlink Status dialog Satlink Status DISABLED Tx succeeded n Tx failed 0 Tx failed due to GP
70. minutes with a one minute offset if sampling was started at 4 00pm samples would be taken at 4 16p 4 31p 4 46p etc Sensor blocks configured in Event mode do not need to be hooked up to Measure blocks but they can be if desired Doing so will result in data being generated either because of a specified change in the sensor input or because the next scheduled sampling time has arrived Measure Properties x Time loo 00 00 el Interval 00 15 00 l i Cancel 210 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Min Max Minimum Maximum MinMax Inputs Input Outputs Min MinTime Number of seconds into current day Count Max MaxTime Number of seconds into current day RMaxVal Description This block outputs its data set at the time and interval defined by the user The block examines the data received prior to its scheduled interval in order to determine its outputs the maximum value received the minimum value received the time of maximum value the time of minimum value and the number of values received The number from the time outputs is determined by the number of seconds since 00 00 00 of the current day e g a time of 3600 would be 01 00 00 The block also outputs RMaxVal which is the value of an optional related item at the time the maximum occurred This related item is a point in the setup
71. multi drop most common with LOS radio systems where messages can be sent to any station in a network Rx Bad Number of bad SSP messages detected This would be messages which could not pass a CRC 16 check Tx Good Number of SSP messages transmitted and acknowledged Tx Total Number SSP messages attempted Tx Bad Number of times an SSP message could not be sent Clear Sets all the statistics to zero Bps The number of bits received and or transmitted per second computed using a 2 second moving average If screen updates or file transfers seem sluggish it might be because you re not achieving a very high bps This can be caused for numerous reasons including an underpowered PC communication errors or just that the Xpert is very busy with processing The rate achieved will vary depending on what s being performed For instance under even the best circumstances a file transfer to the Xpert will be limited by how fast the Flash Disk can be written Key This keys powers on a radio transmitter asserts DTR and RTS and can only be used when XTerm is configured to communicate with a LOS Radio UnKey This unkeys a radio transmitter drops DTR and RTS and can only be used when XTerm is configured to communicate with a LOS Radio Check Mail This checks to see if you ve received a mail message via SSP When a mail message is received you may hear a beep or the RingOut Wav file played if it s on your system Bringing th
72. not exist Press OK to create it Before leaving the setup tab a special log file must be created SSP log it is only special because this is where EZSetup places all sensors and this is where communications interfaces look to get TAG data Had this log file been created already this warning message would not have appeared Since the system has detected this log file does not exist it has asked to create one For this example setup click OK and create the default size SSP LOG file for now See Chapter 3 Log Files for more details on this Now that the SSP log file is created go to the MAIN tab and press START recording That s it The system is recording data and is going to transmit it on the GOES transmitter Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com GRAPHICAL SETUP TO COMPUTE DAILY MIN MAX For this example a 0 5 VDC level sensor with a 10ft range is used The last measured value daily minimum maximum time of minimum and time of maximum are displayed on the front LCD and logged It is a good idea to first draw out in a notebook the desired flow of data at first simply write down what data needs collected and if it is just logged or displayed or both Then look through the manual if an input block exists to make the measurement use it if not find a generic input block VDC for voltages In this example the data also n
73. or a base station PCBASE XCONECT this name is case sensitive therefore it should be entered in UPPERCASE letters to avoid confusion NOTE If the station name is changed power must be cycled for SSP communications to use the new name When the Xpert is started it will try to load a setup file with the same name as the station name Station Status The Station Status box indicates both the recording and alarms states and contains buttons to affect those states The recording status box indicates the current state of recording i e whether measurements are being made and logged This box also indicates whether transmissions are enabled when recording is on When recording is off the status box reads OFF and the button to its right is labeled Start Pushing Start will start recording changing the status box to read ON or ON TX if transmissions have been enabled in the setup The Start button then changes to read Stop The alarm status box indicates the current alarm state The current alarm state may be NORMAL ALARM or ALERT The Clear button is used to clear the current state a clear during ALERT transmissions the system to ALARM while a clear during ALARM transmissions the system to NORMAL See Coms SSP CL under Setup for more information Contrast The contrast setting for the Xpert touchscreen display can be adjusted using the lt and gt buttons The gt button increases the
74. shared between systems or because not all installations require them are often also included e A DB9 M F serial cable for I O Modules e One or more Analog I O modules One or more Digital I O modules One or more termination boards System enclosure box Lead acid battery Solar panel regulator Other Optional Items One or more of the following might also be included e Analog digital or SDI 12 sensors e Modem Line of Site Radio or Satellite transmitter e Antenna 8 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com INITIAL CHECKOUT Powering Up To start the Xpert connect power 9 5 to 16 VDC to the G and power connections on the left side of the terminal strip labeled PWR When power is applied the Xpert will first display a startup screen and then if configured to do so display the login screen Note do not touch the screen during power up as this may cause the Xpert to run one of its special power up routines Adjust the Contrast optional On the Xpert if the login screen is not readable the contrast may need adjustment Try tapping the display in the upper right corner to darken the display or tap in the lower right corner to lighten it Wait at least 2 seconds each time you tap the display for the adjustment to take effect If tapping the display has no effect the application program is probably not running Refer to the
75. temperature WT Barometric pressure BP Battery voltage BAT For NFDRS the labels tell the formatter how to format the data The following table shows what labels are recognized by the NFDRS formatter and how they are formatted Sensor Label Format Rainfall PCH XX XX 10 Min Avg Wind Spd USH XXX 10 Min Avg Wind Dir UDH XXX Air Temperature TAH XXX Fuel Temperature MTH XXX 10 Min Avg Rel Hum XRH XXX Battery Voltage VBH XX X Barometric Pressure PAH XX XX Peak Wind Direction UGX XXX Peak Wind Speed UPH XXX Fuel Moisture MMH XXX Solar Radiation RDH XXXX For INSAT the labels are used to identify the sequence and formatting parameters to use when formatting the message For each label an id offset and scale are associated The standard INSAT message encodes the id in an unsigned 4 bit integer and encodes the data value in an unsigned 10 bit integer The id is a unique integer from 0 to 19 and is used to determine order note however that since INSAT only uses 4 bits to encode ids ids appear to start over after 15 this typically requires that decoders consider position in addition to id Encoded values are computed as in the following 240 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com encoded value input data offset scale 0 5 Sensor Label Id Offset Scale Avg Air Temperature A
76. the specified sequence The system will timeout if the user doesn t enter a code in less than one minute Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Use Branch USER BranchDTMF Label to build a menu system Label USER 0 gt SpeakPhrase Hello welcome to the Sutron Xpert This introduction is repeated Pause 1 0 over and over for up to 60 SpeakPhrase Please press pound sec until the user presses the Pause 2 0 button on the phone BranchNoDTME USER BranchDTMF Label DMTF Label USER 1 SpeakPhrase For live data SpeakPhrase Please press SpeakPhrase 1 Pause 1 0 SpeakPhrase To acknowledge alarms BRANCH SpeakPhrase Please press DTMF will go to SpeakPhrase 2 the DTMF Pause 1 0 number pressed SpeakPhrase To hang up SpeakPhrase Please press SpeakPhrase 3 BranchDTMF Label DTMF 1 SpeakAllTags Pause 1 0 Branch USER 1 Label DTMF 2 DTMF speaks tags and DTMF 2 Acknowledges alarms speaks alarms and then returns to the top menu AckAlarms with BRANCH USER O0 SpeakPhrase Alarm DTMF 3 will hang up the SpeakPhrase Acknowledge phone SpeakPhrase Thank you Label DIMF ANY say that if Pause 1 0 any other DTMF is pressed return to the top menu Branch USER 1 Label DTMF 3 SpeakPhrase Thank you SpeakPhrase Please call again Hangup Label DTMF ANY Branch USER 1 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time
77. the Xpert to read the WindSonic is much easier Simply specify the com port the sensor is connected to the power setting and the address NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COMS SSP CL set to none as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it The Xpert will output the data in whatever units are set in the WindSonic Gill Wind Properties EVindSonic Type Com Port comi 7 Power Switched v Address lo v Cancel 162 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Heat Flux HeatFlux Inputs lt none gt Outputs Heat Flux Sensitivity Wiring Two models of Hukesflux sensors are supported HFPO1 and HFPO1SC The latter model supports a periodic self calibration procedure involving an onboard heating element HFPO1 For single ended operation connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect V and V to an adjacent input channel pair e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc and check the Differential checkbox HFPOISC Connect as shown in the diagram below Battery Htr DIO Chan Htr AIO Chan Battery Heater Compl Res 10 ohm typ AIO Chan Sensor AIO Chan or AGND Description The HeatFlux block is used to measure heat flux via a Hukesflux HFPO1 or HFPO1SC he
78. the specified directory e g m Flash Disk Speech r rename specified file e g r Flash Disk DefLib sll Flash Disk Deflib bak Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Manual Component Upgrade Individual firmware components can be upgraded using a variety of methods other than those listed above This section describes a few of those methods Be careful upgrading individual components of Xpert firmware because of incompatibilities across different versions The set of files contained in a single download archive from the website are all compatible As a general rule don t mix with other versions unless specifically told to do so by Sutron customer service Upgrade the Boot Loader The Xpert boot menu provides the ability to upgrade the Xpert boot loader either by serial or ethernet transfer 1 Download either the serial or storage card upgrade from the Sutron website at the following address www sutron com downloads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 v3 0 zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC The boot loader is stored in the file Xpert2 lod 2 Start hyperterm or other terminal program on a PC Set the baud rate to 115 200 Connect the COM1 serial port to the Xpert If you intend to transfer the boot loader file via ethernet connect t
79. this SLL is to receive data from an Aanderaa logger but may also be used to parse any space or comma separated numeric data using an RS 232 com port AirGap sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow users to connect a MIROS Air Gap water level sensor to one of the COM ports AlohaHazmat sll Formats and outputs messages specific to the Aloha Hazmat PC desktop software via com port Supports Aloha weather station ASWellL sll This SLL implements a custom processing block to support Alamosa Salvage Well control ATDisplay sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow users to display information from and Xpert Xlite LOG file on an Adaptive Technologies display device Adaptive Technologies offers a variety of indoor and outdoor displays that can be used to make information in an Xpert easily accessible to the public AtoN sll Adds ability to select sensor values for inclusion into an AIS Message 8 broadcast over an AtoN Aid to Navigation radio e g the Mando 3 by Alltek AWOS sll This SLL implements custom processing blocks and reporting mechanisms to support AWOS weather stations CoOp sll This SLL implements custom sensor and processing blocks to support CO OP weather stations Sensors include OTT Rain gauge and Stevens Soil moisture probe Processing block for the Geonor Rain gauge is also included Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http
80. update what it adds and what it fixes contact Sutron Customer Service and request the engineering bulletin for the update When new firmware is released the user upgrades in one of two ways Serial Ethernet Upgrade Serial cable connected to COM on the Xlite and optionally ethernet cable connected to DHCP enabled network Storage Card Upgrade SD or USB flash drive does not upgrade loader nor micro monitor WHEN UPGRADING TO v3 8 OR HIGHER FROM v3 7 OR LOWER YOU MUST UPGRADE THE LOADER SEE Upgrade the Boot Loader BELOW AFTER UPGRADING THE LOADER UPGRADE THE APPLICATION AND KERNEL DO NOT DOWNGRADE TO v3 7 FROM A VERSION HIGHER THAN v3 7 WITHOUT OFFLOADING YOUR DATA FIRST DOWNGRADING TO v3 7 FROM A HIGHER VERSION WILL RESULT IN A LOSS OF DATA ON FLASH DISK SD CARDS ARE SUPPORTED SDHC CARDS ARE NOT YET SUPPORTED Serial Ethernet Upgrade The Upgrade button on the right side of the XTerm window is used to start a software upgrade using this method The steps to perform this kind of upgrade are as follows 1 Download the upgrade from www sutron com downloads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 vX X X X zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC 2 Connect your PC to the Xpert using a direct serial cable connection to COM1 Optionally connect the Xpert to a DHCP enabled network via ethernet cable 3 Start XTerm exe on your P
81. used on wind direction sensors where the output is 0 360 degrees With this box checked the average will properly compute the average direction even when the sensor changes through 360 degrees The Schedule fields are used to control when the software reinitializes its computations The process of re initialization eliminates computational errors that would otherwise occur In the following example the moving average would reinitialize its computations every 12 hours synchronized to midnight Moving Average Properties Schedule K Time 00 00 00 Interval 12 00 00 EER Circular Sample Input Interval loo 00 30 e Cancel Duration oo 10 00 212 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com rl Polynomial Poly Inputs PolyIn Outputs PolyOut Description The Polynomial block is an extremely flexible generate purpose processing block that can apply a polynomial function in any part of the Setup Diagram data stream The orders of the desired equation up to 5 order are entered next to kO through k5 If the units to be outputted from this block are different from those of the signal that were inputted those new units can be entered via Units Polynomial Properties Evaluate kOe L x k2 472 21 k x45 op LE eE mp Id p Ld fb fess k5 b fl A good use of this block is to generating meaningful value
82. volts and VREF to sensors powered before taking measurements Sensors requiring a longer settling time also called warm up time should have this value increased Range for using the switched 12 volts is 0 to 30000 30 seconds for external AIO module 141 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Barometric Pressure BP Inputs lt none gt Outputs BP Temp Wiring Connect the sensor to the SDI 12 port Description This block supports the Sutron Accubar Barometer part 5600 0120 This is an SDI 12 sensor Select the pressure units the SDI 12 address of the sensor and the averaging time averaging time is used to increase the measurement accuracy by lengthening the sampling time This block can also return temperature by clicking the box next to Enable Temperature and selecting the desired temperature units Accubar Barometer Properties Pressure Units mb 7 3 SDI Address o Cancel Averaging Time s p d V Enable Temperature Celsius Fahrenheit 142 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com BEI Absolute Encoder BEIEnc Inputs lt none gt Outputs Output Wiring Connect the sensor to a RS232 port as follows wiring is shown for the 6461 1239 protection board Color Name Pin 64
83. 0 0 q IP port 52735 Header Interval f IP to allow defaults to 0 0 0 0 which allows any client to connect to the server any other value will restrict connections to that IP a URL may not be used in this field EEE IP port selects the TCP port to be used for connecting to the server and must not conflict with other TCP ports used by the system the default value is 52735 Header interval defines how often a header is output in a separate line before the data record 0 for never 1 for every time 2 for ever other time 3 for every third time etc The header describes the contents of the data record As long as the Header Interval is not 0 a new header will be appended after recording has been turned ON to ensure any changes to the setup are reported 233 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com i WebLog Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The WebLog block allows you to place the value connected to the input on the Xpert web page The Xpert web page is a single page of HTML containing the names and values of interest in the logger The Sensor Name field sets the name that will be used on the web page and the precision controls how to display the value When Log scheduled time is checked the scheduled time of the data value is used as the timestamp of the data shown on the webpage When Log scheduled time
84. 03 406 2800 http www sutron com the data was last updated In this latter case it s important to make sure all field and record measurement schedules are set up to ensure that field data measurements are complete when the record is computed and logged Hanging separator determines whether to terminate the formatted output with a separator character For example if the property is checked and the separator character is a comma the logged data will have a comma at its end as well as between all fields If the property is not checked no comma will appear at the end of the logged data This property is most useful in ensuring the output is compatible with automatic parsing logic used after the log is downloaded The Seg 1 time property determines what timestamp will be given to the log entry If the property is checked the timestamp given is the time of the data in the first formatted field typically the field having Sequence 1 If the property is not checked the timestamp given is the time the LogRec block runs which is typically determined by the schedule of the measure block connected to the LogRec block s output When FTP is checked logged data will be appended to a file on a FTP Server To select the details press and the FTP Logging Properties dialog will be displayed FTP Logging Properties ur oi File IP port fi User name Password E fae Header interval i
85. 35 AHRS Y201 serial camera WetLabs ECO Puck and AADI Conductivity Sensor 4319 The level of custom processing is Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com high Please contact Sutron Customer Service for more information about using this SLL VibratingWire sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow users to connect a Canary Systems VW DSP serial interface to one of the COM ports on a Sutron Xpert or XLite Model 9210 data logger The VW DSP can be used by itself to measure temperature and pressure from two vibrating wire sensors e g those made by Geokon The VW DSP can also be wired to one or more Canary Systems MiniMuxes providing the capability to measure from additional sensors in increments of 16 or 32 per MiniMux VWireMux sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow user to log multiple pressure transducer and optional thermistor readings by using a Canary Systems MiniMux digital switch Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PREPARING FOR SETUP This section discusses various issues important to know before setting up the Xpert Analyze the System Chapters 3 and 4 describe all the elements that go into setting up the Xpert Before jumping in to setting up the unit it s useful to think about the nature of the problem t
86. 5 rigger E Random Group RndGroup 0 0 ce eeeeeeeseeescesecesecesecssecaecsaecseecseseseseaeeeeeseesseeesecssecsaecsaecaaecaeesaeseneseneee 236 Rs Random Parameter Ramdom cccsssseceessececssecececsecceceesaeeecseaaececseeecessseeecseaaeeecseeeecseeeeesseaeeesseneeeess 238 ST pA Self Timed Parameter SelfTimed cccccecessscceessececeesececssececeeseeeecseaececseceeeessueeecseaeeesseaaeeesseeeeeneaes 239 OUTPUT BLOCKS me a a senior ds a a a a a A A a a r 244 Duy Binary Out BMO ieee e OE davabegecta nce e Sea E E Ea Ae deduce cbenbobinncese beets 244 Ed Pulse Out PulseOut soreer oie aaen eie o Ere EEr e EEr EESE Ere eee ep eae 245 F A d Send Tat osrin A RE E E A R E E als R 246 MISCELLANEOUS BLOCKS ahere e eeen ra e ea EE ES EEES E ETS ER EITE EEEE E E ESEE Rer k EEEE oot 247 Display DIS pliye E E EA ET EEEE E E EEEE E E bane 247 play Display F ar f f __ Field Variable Field Var icc areren ai ees i ee a ch EESE Ere nra eoe e E e 248 APPENDIX B UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ccccsscsssssssscssescssssssccsssssesssssnessssnessesssssssnssnessssnessessessesseees 251 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ss sscecocy sssavaderapevechdegscednad Sesa ape eo EE SE Aee IRES ESA T TE IE IREE EEN REESEN 252 Serial Eth rnet Upgrades eeaeee reee esperes aes ea rE En aa EEEE S Ee TE EEE Ea ESETET SEER REDERE E OEE a Seni 252 Customizing a Seral Et ernet Upgrade errereen areren eriei nA EE IROA CAE CIE RENETI SEE vod 253 Storage
87. 61 1239 Red 12 6 White RXD 2 Blue TXD 3 Green DTR 1 BLK Brown GND 5 Note jumper J3 on the 6461 1239 to DTR Also make sure to configure Xpert for 12 on pin 9 of the DB9 Also note that the encoder must be set to 4800 N 8 1 Description This block supports the BEI Absolute shaft encoder This encoder connects to any of the Xpert RS232 ports See the section Wiring for the details of the connections There are three user set properties for the BEI Encoder Com Port Range and Offset Use Com Port to specify which RS232 port the encoder is connected to NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COMS SSP CL set to none as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it Range and Offset are used to scale the reading to the proper units The equation used is Output Reading Range Offset BEI Encoder Properties Com Port coma v Cancel iil Range 0 01 B Offset booo fl 143 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Binary Input Binin Inputs lt none gt Outputs BinOut Wiring Signal Any digital input channel Ground Any available ground Description This is a general purpose block for configuring a binary input hooked to a Digital I O module The Channel is one of the eight inputs available on the module see Appendix C I O Modules
88. 7 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ76B Y 0 00 01 800 0 00 05 COM9 1 7 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ76C Y 0 00 03 500 0 00 05 COM9 2 9 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 The fields of the file are defined as follows 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 e Name the desired tag name for the computed water level The tag name may refer to the name of a ComsTag block in the graphical setup which can then be measured to log and or transmit measured values e Enabled Y or N Setting to N disables the measurement e Time and Interval determine the measurement time and interval and should be formatted HH MM SS COM Port name should include the colon e g COM2 COM3 etc Channel 1 2 The AVW200 channel to measure either 1 or 2 A B K TO and SO readings come from Geokon 4500S cal sheet C is typically a calculated value It can be computed initially based on calibration sheet information It can be recalculated in field during installation if desired to improve accuracy e SI Name Reference Barometric correction This is optional If unused leave blank 195 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PROCESSING BLOCKS Alarm Inputs Input Outputs Hi Alarm True 1 if the data is in Hi Alarm otherwise false 0 Lo Alarm True 1 if the data is in
89. A processing block such as Measure or Average is used to request data of this block unless Event is checked With Event checked the output will update on change of state Use Edge to determine which edge of the state change to trigger Rising Low High Falling High gt Low Both either direction The Filter parameter can be used to eliminate false state transition detections due to noise The Filter value should be a number between 0 and 255 The higher the number the longer the new state change must exist for the change to be seen by the digital I O module Each increment of the filter value represents about 0 5ms of time If this block is used in an EZSetup measurement with the Event checked this will force ALL measurements to occur when an Event occurs So for example if you had an EZSetup measurement schedule with the BinIn block and a sdi 12 sensor every time the BinIn detected a change of state the SDI 12 sensor would also be measured If Invert is checked the output from this block will be the inverted value of what is seen at the channel e g if the input is grounded a binary 1 is output instead of a binary 0 Input states are OV binary 0 gt 2 5V binary 1 144 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Binary Input Properties Digital 1 0 Module 1 7 Channel 2 Cancel Invert Input Event V
90. Bridge Properties Analog 1 0 Module Input Channel Cancel Excitation Channel Slope I Teal EE Offset Warmup 1100 148 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 6 CapRain CapRain Inputs lt none gt Outputs Rain Wiring Connect the sensor output to the selected analog channel Connect the sensor power to PROT 12 B17 and GND B16 or Description The CapRain block is designed to make measurements from an RM Young 50202 Capacitive Precipitation Gauge It may also work with other rain gauges with an analog output The RM Young 50202 sensor has an analog output 0 5 volts corresponding to 0 50mm 0 to 2 5 inches rain The sensor automatically empties itself so the output will periodically go to zero The CapRain block has special processing designed to prevent measurements while the gauge is emptying the bucket This processing takes two measurements of the gauge two seconds apart If the output drops by more than 0 1 volts in this two second interval the system sleeps for 5 seconds and then tries again Up to six retries will be performed before the system logs an error The block also has a special algorithm to accumulate the rain as though the bucket were not being emptied If the current value measured has gone down by 1 5 of the range since the last measured value the software concludes that the gaug
91. Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Specifications Input Range 0 1 to5V any input with respect to ground single ended or differential A D Range Single Ended 0 5 V 78 mV 19 5 mV with respect to ground Differential 2 5V 78 mV 19 5 mV input with respect to input CMRR 120 dB typ Input Impedance gt 10 Gohm typ Accuracy 0 002 of 5V typ 0 003 of 78mV typ HiGain 0 03 of 19 5mV typ x128Gain Temp Coefficient 5 ppm C typ Ratio Accuracy Limited by A D resolution no non linearities or TC seen Noise floor RMS noise typically lt 1bit on 78mV scale and above Excitation 2 5V up to 50 mA SwBat 250 mA Protection Multistage input protection including spark gaps 266 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Example Configurations Using the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module Note All references to Vref and AGND are to the terminals on the module performing the measurement Do not connect to similarly named terminals on other modules Single Ended Voltage Measurement Example VREF 20 ohm or 100 completion CHANNEL EXCITATION CHANNEL both set to same channel RESISTOR Two Wire Resistance Measurement Example SW D 12 4 20 mA Sensor 420 20 for 100 Ohm Resistor CHANNEL
92. C To use ethernet much faster than serial alone start XTerm from a command prompt and specify LAN on the command line e g XTerm exe COM1 115200 LAN 4 Press the Upgrade button on the right side of the XTerm window 5 Select the file Xpert2 vX X X X upg where X s are replaced by firmware version in the Open dialog The upgrade will proceed and finish automatically 6 The contents of the upgrade file specify what part of the Xpert to upgrade The parts upgraded may include the loader kernel application files speech files and custom 252 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com application files SLLs When Sutron releases a new version of software for the Xpert the new version is distributed along with a new upgrade file 7 After selecting the upgrade file XTerm uses the upgrade file as a script to guide the upgrade process Dialogs are displayed showing the progress of the upgrade Occasionally the upgrade script may cause the Xpert to reboot in order to make changes If for some reason the upgrade fails the process will keep retrying and the last error will be displayed If it appears the process is not going to complete you have the option to press Cancel and abort the upgrade At this time you will be prompted if you d like to view the recent serial port history If you click yes then you can see what some of the r
93. C date and time validity are checked If determined to be invalid the unit will set the date to 1 1 1984 A unit that sets its date to 1984 needs to have its internal battery checked and most likely replaced To replace the battery remove power from the unit remove the 8 screws holding the bottom of the case to the top slide the bottom out of the top locate the battery use a small screwdriver to help lift the battery out of the holder slide the new battery into the holder 129 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Cleaning Instructions The touch screen can be cleaned with common mild window cleaning products To clean the Xpert touch screen spray the cleaner on a clean cloth and then wipe the touch screen Do not spray directly on the touch screen as the cleaner may run down into the Xpert You do not need to remove the power from the Xpert to clean the touch screen The Xpert case can be cleaned using common mild window cleaning products Do not spray the cleaner directly on the Xpert Instead spray the cleaner on to a clean cloth and then wipe the case clean Never spray cleaner directly on the terminal strips or on the wiring Fuses There are no replaceable fuses in the Xpert The Xpert does use a number of self resetting fuses to help protect the unit from damage when lines coming from the Xpert are shorted You may optionally use a fuse
94. Card Upgrade SD or USB ws cc s sos scsstisceves caeesscigass penvesssesicesses chee sseucbeesn openbestanphstubes ston ssessenes poapesenees 256 Customizing aStorase Card Up stade isnt 2 cats a aa e a e a glee econ stastbe asdutostsiav er saieddevepstucetetes EEES 256 Manual Component Upgrade arp r EE S EE Er E AEE EE EEEE ERE SR EEEo 257 Upsrade the Boot Loader orsescrar arin ane an a E E E reas A EN RE EE T RANE 257 Upgrade the Kernel Upgrade th Application 5 s2 5 se 2 eevssesndubes onnie rr e aT E EA E Na E N E aS 258 APPENDIX C VOMODULES sssssesscsscsscsscssenesscsnssccsscssescsssnsssssnessessessosssssnessssnesscssssessessnssssssessessessosseees 259 ANALOG T O MODULE 8080 000 3 iin eien eE E EEEE EEN AEE AE den E EEEE E E teuees 260 PE AUUTeS cites suc iveste scweves ee AE A E S A E A conten E E e a a outs 260 Specifications eiai ionene rean EEEo AEAEE EE EEE euke GES E N E E EE EEEE EEE aS 261 Operational States eepe eseo oean evs eeen p Eee SNr du gees Speo Eep EEEo SORE O gous Spe n EEEE Sp esei 262 RUMI E a ei e E tea RN OE EE ER E EE EE A A AN A AR A EA AOA R 262 Stopp d ssnin kea anier heheh a a a e a a hari ea eaaa i aaiae e 262 JETEN ATAO DLHE IPE EEEE E ET 262 a a a e tent aati 262 OUP UtS aE EA O O ARREO OANE ADORE AEA AE E APATENI APEA UE ATETEA TE AIE AES 262 Analog Measurements isone ts fee ates eaa ca eee EE aa Enae aeaea OEN tuna Ee EEES ee EErEE SER 262 AN CCULACY ori ioen ee E ea E E E E E E sd e Ea e
95. D DC Resistance 3 wire Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Connect one end of the resistor to excitation channel and input channel using separate wires Connect the other end of the resistor to GND Vx VI RS GND DC Resistance 4 wire Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Select differential measurement Connect one end of the resistor to excitation channel and input channel CH1 CH3 or CH5 using separate wires Connect the other end of the resistor to an input channel CH2 CH4 or CH6 and GND using separate wires Connect the sensor to channels 1 2 3 4 etc as selected for a differential measurement Connect the sensor as shown below Vx Vit VI GND AC Resistance 2 wire Set excitation channel to match input channel See connection information for DC Resistance AC Resistance 3 wire Set excitation channel to be different from input channel 137 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com See connection information for DC Resistance AC Resistance 4 wire Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Select differential measurement See connection information for DC Resistance Thermistor 2 wire Set excitation channel to match input channel Connect the thermistor or any resistance device as shown below The excitation channel is Vx Th
96. DI 12 port or via I O modules that plug into the C port For data retrieval the Xpert comes with up to four serial ports for connection to satellite modem a PC the Internet etc In addition every unit comes with a minimum thirty two megabytes of flash disk for data and program storage and thirty two megabytes of RAM for program execution All units support expanding storage up to 2GB via the SD card slot All inputs to the systems can be found at the bottom side of the unit as shown below The Xpert requires power from an external battery of 9 5 16 VDC All the functionality in the Xpert can be accessed through the touch screen of the device The screen can be activated either with the special stylus that came with the system or with a finger All the operations necessary to operate the unit can be done via the graphical interface on the touch screen For units without a touch screen the windows based program Xterm exe provides the necessary screens for operation Xpert Shown with display and 4 additional com ports Xpert with display and 4 additional com ports 4 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 Xpert Connector Panel Models The Xpert comes in several different models The available models include 8080 0000 1B Xpert with Display and Backlight 8080 0000 2B Xpert with Display and Backlight and 8 Serial ports 8080 0000 3B Xpert with Display and Back
97. Display Display Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The Display block is used select data that gets displayed on the 9210 s I2C Display The data displayed is the last measured value for the block connected to the display block The data is displayed at the requested precision right digits with the selected Label Display Properties Label LEVEL f Right Digits 2 LJ OK Cancel 247 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com L Field Variable FieldVar Inputs Input Outputs Output pass through Description The FieldVar block is used to tag properties in the setup so that these properties can be changed in the same way as other system tags ComsTags Basic tags etc System tags can be changed via the Data tab via a Basic program via the set command and via SSP command Note that changing the value of a property is reserved for users having setup access priveleges The FieldVar block has one input and one output Connect the output of the target block to the FieldVar input Viewing the properties of the FieldVar block shows a list of changeable properties of the target block Below is an example of the FieldVar properties screen when hooked up to a Measure block Select Field Variables Internal Name Public Name OK v Interval Measure Interval Time Cancel L
98. E If you are connecting a modem or other devices to the Xpert you will need to modify the autoexec bat to support these devices as explained in the sections that follow Connect a PC to COM using a straight through cable Connect power to the Xpert Turn on the power Observe the Xpert startup Press Setup Access and log into the Xpert If you are using I O modules do the following to make sure the I O modules are at the desired addresses a Select the Setup tab b Select the in front of the I O Module label c Examine the names of the I O modules The names will be AIO and DIO followed by a module number For each type of module AIO or DIO there can be only one number of each type e g there can t be two AIO1 modules If there are follow the next step to change Furthermore the setup will expect you to connect sensors based on the module number You have multiple AIO or DIO modules make sure they each have the proper module number d Select each module and press EDIT Examine the name serial number and module number e If you want to change a module number use the button to enter a new module number If you have a users dat file use XTerm to load it into the flash disk This defines the login accounts for the Xpert If you don t have a user dat file you may use the users branch of the Setup tab to set one up Then save it back to the PC so you can use it at other sites if desired If you will be using a voice modem transfer to the
99. ET E a Ap EE EErEE EEE TE E E EErEE EET er EEE Ss 128 Unit missing functionality sssini ieren esep cove rE Er EE PEE OE EE EEEE EErEE EKETE k Te rRe ESSES 128 Xterm has a White screen or Black Screen ceeeessceseeeesseceeeeecseceeeeecseceseeecsaeceeeeecsaeceeeeecsaeceeeeessaeceeeeecaeeesees 129 Adjust the contrasta eane cess Leesa S ge cped Aves R a e aa chs anata tases Detector ies 129 Replace the Internal Battery every 5 years oe eee cesecssecsceceecseeeneeeeeeseeeeseesecesecsaecsaecsaecaaecaeecaeeeseseaeseaeees 129 Cleaning InstructrOMs n e ee ar E ERE eA EER a aa che sa pa cates Leased OE KOT eVa E ITSS eE 130 FUS S e r E E T EE E E E E SEa 130 APPENDIX A SETUP BLOCKS 0 cscsscsscsscsscscsscsscsssscsscsssscsssnessssnescesssssssossnessssnescessessessossnessssnessessessossoeee 131 INTRODUCTION is irin ae tos Mes benssest Sewevthtan ds Ads Suwa ses Senouvee subs R duets luebteubepsuees sees aeabends E Coates 132 SENSOR BLOCKS nee a tee RSs ooh se Sep E sce Rss R e E Sed E a au tein Sad te bath ei bemeown eats 133 Air Temperature Sensor AirTemp cc eeceecescesecsecesecseecseecseeeseeeeeeeeeseesseesecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeeeaeseneeeaeees 133 f e EH Air Temperature Relative Humidity AT RH essseesseseesesrssierrsresrssrrereresressestesresrerresesrenestreresreeteseereset 135 a PUE Analoge ADC eones E oe Reh me RA 136 BP Barometric Pressure BP uee ie ieee gees Ane eases 142 vi A 2 I INES zi IES
100. K Units o OK o oi F G O Cancel 166 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Log Input Inputs lt none gt Outputs LogVal the value retrieved from the log Wiring None Description This block retrieves the last value from the log for the sensor indicated This block is most useful when data is logged by EzSetup or an Xpert Basic program but needs to be processed in the Graphical Setup When scheduling this block be sure to schedule it so that is runs after the desired data is logged Log Properties Log Name Flash Disk SSP LOG 7 Sensor Name Stage B Gf Cancel 167 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DeltaT ML2x Soil Moisture Sensor ML2x Inputs lt none gt Outputs Dielectric Moisture Wiring The sensor is measured single ended Hence connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH10 and signal ground to AGND Connect power as desired Description The ML2x block is used to measure a Delta T ML2x soil moisture sensor The following dialog is used to configure the block for measurement AIO Module F 7 AIO Channel 4 x Cancel Cal Method Mineral v units AIO Module select the analog module to which you connected the sensor AIO C
101. Label values If they differ the system issues a warning when the setup is saved Group lets you define which random group you are defining the alarm properties for Label defines the string that will be added to the random transmission to identify the group Typically label is a single character such as 2 or 3 e g group number This field can be any length but only the first 3 characters are used in the transmit message A line is placed into the sensors tab for each random group block in the setup This line is provided as a way to see the current alarm status of the different groups If a random group line is selected and measured or if Measure All is pressed then the random group s will pull and evaluate their data This can result in one or both of the following conditions If the random group were placed into the setup after a log block this would send the data pulled into the log with the time stamp of when it was measured If it is desired to not have this data go into the log the random group should be placed before the log block This will also evaluate alarm data before the next measurement This would be useful when a user is at a site and knows that an event occurred that should trigger an alarm transmission before the next measurement interval Time and Interval Time and Interval are used to determine what data is transmitted from the data collected by the random parameter blocks A time of 00 00 00 and i
102. Lo Alarm otherwise false 0 Data pass through of the data ROC Alarm True 1 if the data is in ROC Alarm otherwise false 0 Any Alarm True 1 if the data is in any alarm otherwise false 0 Description The Alarm block checks the input data for alarms The Alarm Properties allow the Alarm block to be configured to detect Hi Alarms Lo Alarms and ROC Alarms The same deadband applies to all types of alarms The Alarm block is also used to configure the unit to send out ALERTS transmissions due to alarm See the following chart for details OFF Do not send out an alert only go into alarm ABOVE Send an alert when the value goes above the HI limit HI Mode deadband and BELOW Send an alert when the value goes below the HI limit deadband LOW Mode BOTH Send an alert when the value goes above the HI limit deadband OR when the value goes below the HI limit deadband Alert on Checked Send an alert based on the ROC mode Above or ROC Alarm Below UNChecked Do not send out an alert Alerts will only occur when the conditions set above are met and will continue until acknowledged note alerts over Iridium and or GPRS are effectively acknowledged once the transmission completes Once in alarm the unit will stay in alarm until the conditions are no longer met Certain devices under the COMS SSP CL menu can have alert disabled see the section under COMS for more 196 Bringing the B
103. OM 2 and a Quadrature shaft encoder to Digital channels 3 4 terminal B I O 3 and I O 4 Log into the system using the SETUP account access Start by setting the station name This name will identify the station and allow the setup file name to be unique Do this from the MAIN Tab by clicking the three dots next to Station Name and typing or clicking the letters on the virtual keyboard LakeTop is used in this example Station Info Date Time Lass 05 29 2003 11 04 47 Station name c LakeTop Go to the Setup Tab this is where the rest of the station configuration will take place Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Coms EzSetup Measurements Graphical Setup I O Modules Log files E A Self test Setup File LakeTop ssf Users Edit Select the Satlink tree by clicking on it then click the EDIT button Satlink Properties Satellite ID poo00000 Comm Port come Initialize Satlink V cancel Set the Satellite ID NESDIS assigned and COM port Satlink is connected to and then click OK If a message saying recording must be turned off appears click YES this will stop the system and let the rest of the setup continue When it asks to restart recording click NO Recording doesn t need to start until the entire setup is completed Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703
104. Port property identifies the COM port to which Satlink is connected Satlink connects to the comm port using a standard DB9 serial cable Local Time Offset The Local Time Offset property defines the difference between the current local time and UTC Universal Time Coordinated This offset is sent to Satlink at recording start The offset is specified in number of minutes and may be negative The Xpert uses the local time offset and the UTC time received from Satlink to set the Xpert s clock In addition the offset is sent to Satlink Satlink 2 s use this value to determine local time Initialize Satlink The Initialize Satlink check box controls whether or not to send transmission settings to Satlink at the start of recording When this box is checked the transmission settings times rates channels etc are sent to the Satlink whenever the unit is started otherwise settings are not sent to the Satlink but assume instead that Satlink has been configured by some other program e g Satlink Communicator Self Timed Dialog The Self Timed dialog allows the setting of the Self Timed transmission properties The properties correspond to settings that will be sent to Satlink to configure it as well as settings that will be used by the Xpert itself to make the transmission A typical dialog is shown below followed by a brief explanation of each property Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporati
105. Properties dialog used to configure the LogRec block Log Record Properties Log name Record ID Separator ve Hanging separator 7 Minimum abe Seq 1 time fl 0 sckT A The Log Name property identifies to which log the record should be added The drop down list contains a list of all logs in the system plus an additional entry that allows you to add a new log lt None gt may be selected to disable storing the data record to log files Record ID identifies the name of the record The name given appears as a selection in all LogField block property dialogs and is used to identify which fields belong to this record In addition Record ID is used to name the record entry in the log The Separator property defines the string to use in between each field when formatting the record for output to the log The Minimum property specifies the minimum number of fields that must be formatted into the record before the record will actually be logged The Skip missing data property determines whether to skip fields whose data has not been updated since the last time the record was formatted and logged Skipping a field means skipping it entirely meaning the formatted record won t contain even a placeholder for the data When this property is not checked all fields are included in the logged entry regardless of when 231 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 7
106. S 0 i Start cPs Clear Reset Fs Close The Refresh button is used to update the status data displayed The Start GPS button is used to manually start a GPS Sync session note Satlink typically manages GPS sync for you The Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Clear button is used to command Satlink to clear its status counters and error messages The Reset FS button is used to command Satlink to reset its failsafe Press Close to close the dialog Self test The Self test branch in the Setup tab is used to manage the self test routines built into the software Self test runs either at startup or when the RUN button is pressed in the dialog When it runs a file named test_results txt is created as a place to preserve the test results As long as this file exists in flash disk the self test routines will run each time the system starts and will continue running until stopped by the user The self test routines prompt for user input or acknowledgment at several points in the test If there is no user input the tests will repeat automatically At the end of each test cycle the system prompts to repeat the tests or exit The user is also given a chance to delete the test results file which will prevent the tests from being run again on the next system start The following tests are performed each time SelfTest executes e Power Consum
107. SC to abort INFO command Example Flash Disk gt INFO Recent Status 10 26 13 42 Stat Remote user Bob logged in 10 26 13 42 Stat Remote user Bob logged out Active for 104 sec Com Status Stopped Memory Load 51 percent Total Physical 7725056 Available Physical 3833856 Total Virtual 33554432 Available Virtual 29163520 Number of resets 110 I2 STATISTICS RxX 22 Error 0 Fail 0 Tx 31 Error 0 Fail 0 NAK 0 TIMEOUT 0 COLLISN 0 OVRFLOW 0 BUSERR 0 RXERROR 0 SLAVETX 0 CHKSUM 0 STOP 0 BUSBUSY 0 RESTART 0 BADCHAN 0 Network Configuration DNS Servers 192 168 168 Ethernet adapter CS8900A1 IP Address o a w 192 168 168 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 168 1 MAIL Command Example Flash Disk gt MAIL Mailbox for COM2 10 26 2005 16 23 53 Mail from BASE Remember to cal the 4 20 input 10 26 2005 16 23 18 Mail from BASE This is a test mail message Flash Disk gt MAIL 2 BASE All taken care of I m leaving the site now Mail delivered MEASURE SHOW Command Example The following measures all sensors and tags Flash Disk gt MEASURE SENSOR BATVAL Battery 12 781 GV BATVAL Temp 28 767 GC 292 Bringi
108. Status screen to be displayed on startup DECODER causes the SSP Message Decoder screen to be displayed on startup Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 7 Installation STEPS TO INSTALL AN XPERT 1 OO SON ON 10 Connect Earth Ground to the Earth connection The earth connection is on the side of the Xpert WARNING Failure to ground the Xpert can make it susceptible to malfunction or damage by surges and other types of interference Optional Wire sensors to the SDI 12 port on the Xpert You can insert multiple wires into each connection If the connection is awkward to use run wires to a separate terminal strip Note on the Xpert you may need to temporarily remove the I2C connector to get better access to the SDI 12 port Optional Stack I O modules together if multiple modules of the same type are used i e 3 Analog I O modules note the serial number of each module before connecting them you will need this for configuration Mount as desired Wire sensors to the terminal strips as needed Connect I O modules to the Xpert I2C connection Optional Connect SATLINK SPEECH MODEM or other communication devices to the desired communications port COM2 COM3 or COM4 The Xpert is wired as DTE so use a straight cable to make the connection Note if your Xpert has COM2 3 and 4 as Female connections the ports are still DT
109. T 0 50 0 10 0 Max Air Temperature ATMax 1 50 0 10 0 Data s integer in id 1 R312 1 2 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 2 Min Air Temperature ATMin 2 50 0 10 0 Soil Temperature ST 3 50 0 10 0 Data s integer in id 3 R334 3 4 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 4 Avg Atmospheric AP 4 600 0 2 0 Pressure Relative Humidity RH 5 0 0 10 0 Data s integer in id 5 R356 5 6 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 6 Net Radiation NR 6 0 0 0 25 Data s integer in id 7 R378 7 8 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 8 Wind Speed WS 8 0 0 10 0 Wind Direction WD 9 0 0 1 0 36 Sun Duration SunD 10 0 0 0 5 Precipitation Duration PrecipD 11 0 0 0 5 Albedometer skyward AlbIn 12 0 0 0 5 Albedometer downward AlbOut 13 0 0 0 5 Global Radiation Global 14 0 0 1 0 Instantaneous Snow ISD 15 0 0 100 0 Depth Snow Depth SD 16 0 0 100 0 Offset is the offset of the sensor s range from 0 Scale is the representable range divided by the range of the sensor If the label entered is not in the table above then it is interpreted as an integer to be used as the Id for the data An Offset of 0 and a Scale of 1 are assumed when encoding the value in this case This enables new sensor data to be included in INSAT transmissions without having predefined 241 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com labels If a different Offset and or Scale is required it can be imple
110. TER SOURCE DESTINATION NOTE CMD LETTER is a single character specifying the command to perform SOURCE is a quoted string specifying a file to operate on DESTINATION is a quoted string specifying a file to operate on Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com NOTE is a message that will be displayed in the progress bar Unused parameters at the end of a command may be omitted Blank quoted strings are not allowed use if you wish to skip a parameter but include a later one If the default source directory is not provided the directory where the upg file is located is used Storage Card Upgrade SD or USB This method offers the benefit of speedy application and kernel upgrades but cannot be used to upgrade the loader or micro monitor Hence this method should only be used when it is clear no upgrade of the loader or micro monitor is needed The steps to perform this kind of upgrade are as follows 1 The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 vxX X X X SC zip SC in this case is meant to signify storage card Once downloaded unzip the archive onto an SD or USB card installed in your PC a Alternatively if the SD or USB card is not installed in your PC but is instead installed in the Xpert you may choose to i Unzip the archive to your PC ii Use the command line interface
111. TS DTR to DSR and Tx to Rx Xpert only SD Card read write test Make sure an SD card is inserted when running this test USB Drive read write test Make sure a USB thumb drive is inserted when running this test Power consumption test All test runs begin with this test The system puts itself into deep sleep for I minute so that the user can measure power consumption Note this test only runs for up to 5 consecutive iterations Xlite display button amp I O module tests Xlite only Xlite I O module test This test requires a factory test header and is not normally run in the field Ethernet IP from DHCP test This test requires the unit be connected to a network providing DHCP services Note this test only runs for one iteration Setup File The Setup File branch in the setup tab is used to manage the setup file containing the system setup and configuration The setup file contains all of the system s settings except for station name Xpert display contrast settings and log export historical data Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Log files a Satlink Self test New Open Save As New The New option is used to reset all settings to a default state with a name specified by the user After selecting New the system prompts for the name of the new setup file If the file specified exists the system warns that it will be overwritten Open The Open o
112. Windows Xpert exe The Xpert application is re started the one stored in the Flash Disk folder if it exists otherwise the one in the Windows folder Options e The YES option will bypass the Are you sure prompt e The P option enables a partial upgrade for situations where just some of the files are being changed Step 2 the deletion of files is skipped This option can be used 288 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com to download a new version of Remote or to add some new SLL files or BAS files VER Displays the build date Remote was created YMODEM file list With no options specified the YMODEM command will ZIP receive files using the Ymodem protocol and store them on the Xpert If the file being transferred has a ZIP extension then it will be automatically expanded and the contents stored in the current folder typically Flash Disk The command may be used to send files using the Ymodem protocol by supplying a file name or a file list A file list is simply a list of files to send delimited by spaces use quotes around files containing spaces e ZIP may be used when sending files to cause the files to be compressed in to a ZIP archive before being transferred The name of the archive will be the same as the first file in the list with a ZIP extension e A transfer can be aborted by pres
113. World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Send Tag Inputs Data Outputs lt none gt Description This block will send the current data in the block to another station using Sutron Standard Protocol SSP communications The properties for the block specify the port to use for the communications and the path or station name The port can be specified only if you have first used the Setup tab Coms SSP CL entry to define some communications ports The path can be a simple station name or a station with full path information included such as patha pathb stationx When the Port selection is TCP IP enter the URL to the destination The Tag property must match the name specified in a COMS Tag in the named station For example Station 1 is measuring water level and wants to send the water level to Station 2 Add a SendTag block after the measure of the water level in Station 1 Set the Name to WaterLevel and also set the port and path for the link between the two stations In Station 2 add a COMS Tag and set the name property to WaterLevel Now whenever the SendTag block runs the code will send the water level to the COMS tag block in Station 2 Tag Properties Port Icom Path URL i e Tag waterLevel Fel Cancel 246 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MISCELLANEOUS BLOCKS
114. a Enoe eO eE dk vie er a an EE e Ero ea e 263 Example Configurations Using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module 00 eee eceecceseceseceseceseceecseecseseneeeeeees 264 ANALOG I O MODULE 8080 0007 cccesscessceceseceeseeceseeessnecseeeeseecsceeesaecsceeesaecsceeesaecesceecsaeceseeecsaeceeneeesaesenee 265 viii IER IAEE EE E EEE EEE EA EE BB A A 265 Transient Protection Installation Note ccccccecccccecccccecececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececessce 265 Specifications osii a ea E T i EEEE O E E O EEE EE TE EE E O EESE EEr eher EEE Sh 266 Example Configurations Using the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module s ssessessessseesssreessseessssesrrsrrsrreresreerssrerrsse 267 DIGITAL I O MODULE 8080 0002 cccccccssssscccccecsessaececececeeseaesecececsensaseeecececeeseaaeseseeeeseseseaeseeseseseaaeeeeeeeenes 268 TIPU kierros E E EE EEE A EE E ls Sasa E E EE E rE E EE EEE E ERE 269 QUEUES 2 cases raa E EE E A og EEE E sacha ES E E EErEE E g EE EEEE TS E EEES 270 APPENDIX D SPECIFICATIONS ssiisiisirisssssesssssssorsssosssesessssorss isseesosss ozss esseessss stsoss seasssi sets ea sessessseseneassebees 271 Basic Unit with Display 8080 0000 1B 8080 0000 2B and 8080 0000 3B sssssssssssssssssrsesrsssrsssssesessse 272 Basic Unit without Display 8080 O001 1 Boo cece eesecesneecssecesaceceaeceseeecaeceeaeeceaeeeeaeecsaeceeeeecsaeeeeaeecsaeeseaters 272 TERNI a E AE ret Pea e
115. a Time 00 00 00 i Data Interval 00 15 00 Num Yalues Sequence flac Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Notice the button labeled VALUE and next to it is a box with the letters UNKNO this is actually saying UNKNOWN VALUE because it has never been measured Because all the parameters needed to make this measurement have now been configured press the VALUE button to force a live measurement Sensor Configuration Name level f Sensor Quase o More Mog Cag Mose saT sT ORo Drs com Tac Malm Rt Digis 2 Lead Value p o modue T Slope f Channel 3 7 offset 0 lel Now the box is displaying the current value 0 00 in the picture To set the level to match the actual level calibration simply press the three dot box next to the data enter the desired reading and the system now has calculated the offset Since this example has 0 00 in it the offset will match what is entered had the system been running for a while and had an actual reading it would have re calculated the necessary offset automatically Click OK to save these changes Cancel Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Coms E2Setup Measurements 01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 01 Level DIO 1 Ch 3 New Sensor New Measurement Graphi
116. abel Put a check next to the property you want to tag Checked properties must have unique Public Names This name defaults to the Internal Name when OK is pressed The Public Name for a property is changed by clicking the property name and then clicking Label Below is an example of how the Data tab looks when a Measure block has been connected to a FieldVar block with Interval checked and assigned the public name of Measure Interval 248 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status MEASURE INTERVAL 00 15 00 Refresh Meas Change 249 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix B Updating the Firmware UPDATING THE FIRMWARE From time to time Sutron will make available new versions of firmware in order to introduce new features and fix the occasional bug These updates are typically made available as downloads on the Sutron website www sutron com downloads software htm If your system is performing up to your expectations you may not want to update your firmware since there is always some risk of introducing a new problem into the system If you are unsure whether to update your system and would like to know more about the contents of a particular firmware
117. adar Stage or Distance values in feet Outputs T mean wave period in seconds Hmo Significant wave height in meters Hmax Maximum wave height in meters T2 Zero up crossing period in seconds Tp Peak Wave period in seconds S Wave spectral estimates in m Hz F frequency vector in Hz In addition to the block outputs listed above the block saves spectral and time series data to CDIP formatted files and offers an option to log the outputs in record format Description The purpose of the block is to process the acquired Sutron Radar Water level data to determine the wave energy spectrum wave height parameters The data is collected once a second for 2048 seconds 34 minutes 8 seconds The data is then processed using industry standard algorithms to produce the mean period significant wave height max wave height zero up crossing period peak wave period and spectrum vector The processing includes the following steps 1 Capture 2048 samples of radar data 2 Verify the data quality for any missing data If there are holes in the data fill them up using interpolation Apply detrending filter on the data and obtain final time domain data Compute the ensemble averaged spectral estimate using FFT techniques Compute the frequency vector OY MeO S p Use wave estimator functions on the spectral estimates and frequency vectors to compute the final output values Configuring the WavProc Block The following section
118. ailing silence to help reduce the size of the file We also recommend using the normalize function to adjust the volume of the recorded phrase 278 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix G Autoexec bat and Remote exe 279 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com AUTOEXEC BAT Starting with version 2 0 0 0 and greater the autoexec bat file is AUTOMATICALLY updated by the system when changes to the COMS are made The only time a user needs to modify the autoexec bat file manually is if the autoexec bat file is corrupted or missing The Xpert executes instructions in the flash disk autoexec bat file on startup If the file doesn t exist or if the user cancels execution the system will run windows remote exe com1 115200 This remote exe program is the program that allows communication with XTerm With remote exe running you will be able to update the software setups and monitor the system as needed To skip autoexec bat on Xpert touch the screen while turning on the Xpert and remain touching it until you see a message box displayed The message box will ask if you want to skip the execution of autoexec bat Press YES If you press NO the system will continue and execute autoexec bat To skip the autoexec bat via a terminal program connec
119. ake a random transmission of all the sensors assigned to that group At other times the Xpert will transmit the data for the different groups according to the setup in the Setup tab A sensor may be in as many groups as desired Along with assigning the sensor to groups this dialog sets the sequence of the sensor in the transmission and the number of values to include in the transmission BIN NONINT format The number of values cannot be set in this dialog if the format is set to BIN INT in the Satlink settings under the Setup tab Random Properties Group Membership Group 2 Group 5 Group 8 Group 3 Group 6 Group 9 cancel Group 4 Group 7 Sequence f e Num Vals i Label 238 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Self Timed Parameter SelfTimed Inputs Input the value you want to transmit Outputs Output pass through Description This block allows you to include the data from the input in a self timed satellite transmission It is most commonly linked to the output of a log block but can also be linked to the output of a measure or average The properties for this Self Timed block specify what data is included in the transmission and some aids for formatting the data The main control of the transmission format is in the Setup tab for Satlink Self Timed In this dialog you
120. ality control theory to improve the accuracy of the reported mean and standard deviation The improvement is obtained by computing the mean and standard deviation it two passes In the first pass the mean and standard deviation are determined by the usual process of simply using the collect samples as is After the standard deviation is computed a second pass is made In the second pass before a sample is added to a sum or squared and added to a sum of squares it is compared to the mean plus or minus three standard deviations Quality Control QC theory indicates that such samples are likely to be in error An updated mean and standard deviation are computed using only the samples that pass the QC check The DQAP block is used to periodically take a number of samples from a sensor and then output the quality controlled mean standard deviation sample count and number of samples failing the QC check For example every half an hour with a five minute offset a sensor could be sampled every two seconds for thirty seconds and then the maximum value sampled outputted see example below 205 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DQAP Average Properties Schedule Time 00 00 00 Interval 00 15 00 Sample Cancel Interval Duration Ho e Specifically the Schedule Interval indicates how often the DQAP block sho
121. an OK then the modem is not working or is not on that comport If you get the OK then issue an AT amp FV1 amp W command to the modem then close the terminal program and try Xterm again Status and Rx Tx Xp Err indicators XTerm features four status indicators Rx Flashes when a message is received Tx Flashes when a message is sent Xp Is lit when XTerm has detected that the Xpert application is running and that communications necessary for a log dump has occurred Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Err Flashes when a message is received that has errors If you see this often then your serial cable may be suffering from crosstalk be wary of very thin serial cables designed to be used for a mouse or your PC may not be capable of keeping up with 115 2K baud serial communication You could try a slower baud rate 57 6K baud or a different com port USB serial ports may have more problems with higher speeds then legacy ports The Status button brings up the Communication Status window ax Good Total Bad bps Pax 290 jo Tx ee key Check Mail Decoder _Uniey Send Mail The Status screen displays information about the current session and allows some testing of the SSP Sutron Standard Protocol connection Rx Good Number of SSP messages received addressed to your PC Rx Total Total messages received SSP supports
122. anches to another part of the speech command specified by a user Label Searching for the label begins with the first line in the speech command BranchDTMF Waits for and branches based on a DTMF press Searching for the label begins at the current line in the speech command The phone will be hungup after 60 seconds if a button is not pushed BranchNoDTMF Same as Branch but the Branch is only performed if a DTMF button was not pressed on the phone This is usefull for repeating a series of Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Call DisableAlarms EnableAlarms Hangup InputManual Label Language Pause Return phrases over and over until the user pushes a button If a button is pushed it will be queued and should be processed by a BranchDTMF command Normally there is a 90 second inactivity timeout that is reduced to 60 seconds when this command is used The phone is hungup if an inactivity timeout occurs Calls a subroutine in another part of the speech command specified by a user Label This works just like the Branch command except that control may be returned to the command after the Call when a Return is encountered Subroutines may call other subroutines Disables further alarm transmissions using the Voice modem and other SSP devices such as LOS Radio They may be re enabled using the EnableAlarms command by Basic
123. ank if a password is not required Port The messages are sent using TCP socket communications with auto detection of the Telnet protocol The standard port for a telnet server including the Xpert2 s is 23 but on a base station that port may not be available or desirable and hence a different port number may be selected with this field Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Communication Test Menu Pressing Test displays the following Test Menu This menu gives communications statistics for the selected COM port along with a way to run some simple tests on the port Key and UnKey force DTR on and off for the port Send Mail and Check Mail can be used to communicate with other Xperts or a master station Mail messages are simple text messages Pressing Send Mail will cause the system to prompt you for a destination and a message The destination can be a master station or another field station For mail to work you will need to have a dedicated or LOS radio communications link Send and Check mail use Sutron Standard Protocol SSP for the mail messages Port comn 7 Good Total Bad 16657 16876 fa 16269 16269 fo Key Check Mail Unkey Send Mail Coms Configuration Settings Rx Tx After you define a device under Coms it is displayed as a sub item of the Coms entry See the picture below where th
124. arm data If a Dial Out message is not defined or the letter D is placed at the beginning of a phone number then a data alarm will be sent The data message will try to automatically detect a PC Base Station and send an SSP message otherwise a simple text message is sent and a prompt is made asking for the alarm to be acknowledged Ma Create Speech Phrase SpeakPhrase Hello welcome to th SpeakaAllTags BranchDTMF Label DTMF 1 SpeakPhrase Thank you English x a5 Cancel Above is an example of the speech phrase editor screen The combo box in the top left is used to select a speech command such as SpeakPhrase The combo box in the top middle is used to select any optional parameters such as the phrase to speak in this example The button is used to edit and or add the command to the command list is used to move a phrase up in the list and is used to move a phrase down x can be used to delete a phrase from the list The combo box on the bottom of the screen can be used to select the language for the phrases displayed this is used in conjunction with the Language command to setup a bilingual speech phrase Speech Dial in and Dial Out commands Command Description AckAlarms Acknowledges alarms in the system Further alert transmissions will cease until a new alert occurs or it s time for an alarm transmission AnswerData Switches to answering the phone in data mode Branch Br
125. ast setting Tab Overview To see all available tabs login using the Setup Access button Many tabs are available clicking one of these tabs will bring it to the foreground for viewing Of all the available tabs the SETUP tab is used primarily to set the system up the other tabs simply provide station status or details on collected data Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MAIN TAB After logging in the display should look similar to the one shown below with the MAIN tab in the foreground The MAIN tab is where information about the station status is primarily displayed Across the top of the screen is a text label that identifies the platform Under this label are a series of tabs like the tabs on file folders These tabs are used to provide quick access to the different functions Main Setup Sensors Log Status Station Status Recording OFF Station Info Date Time 10 17 2008 15 44 59 Station name Alarm fxpert NORMAL Clear Contrast Battery voltage Em a o Bera fes Logout The screen image below reveals tabs for Main Setup Sensors Data Log and Status The actual tabs displayed on a system depend on the DLLs installed in the system and the access mode selected at login Date Time Date and or time are used to perform scheduled functions The internal
126. at flux sensor The following dialog is used to configure the sensor for measurement 163 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com HeatFlux Model HFPOISC 7 k AIO Module 1 7 Cancel eza AIO Channel 3 7 i Differential V Sensitivity 1 o B Select the type of heat flux sensor in Model and specify the analog I O module and channel in AIO Module and AIO Channel Check the Differential checkbox if the sensor has been wired for differential measurement Enter Sensitivity from the manufacturer s cal sheet Calibration Press the Cal button to configure model HFPO1SC for calibration HeatFlux Calibrate Interval h J6 Duration m J3 Eo B Compl Resistor fe Cancel Rself Htr DIO Mod Chan Bol Htr AIO Chan Post cal delay m J The calibration procedure involves periodically turning on a heating element to generate a known heat flux that can be measured to obtain a correction for measurements of unknown environmental heat fluxes HAAA pg snared M Relay IE Specify how often to perform a self calibration in Interval hours and the length of the calibration in Duration minutes Specify the value of the completion resistor in line with the heater power supply 10 ohm typically Specify the Rself value provided by the manufacturer s data sheet
127. ater pio Mod 2 Te DIO Chan Time 00 00 00 sia Interval 12 00 00 Sun Duration 01 00 00 P l EEE To enable heater operation check the Enable Heater checkbox When enabled the system turns on the heater for the specified Duration according to the specified schedule in Interval and Time For example if Time is 00 15 00 Interval is 12 00 00 and Duration is 01 00 00 then every 12 hours at 12 15 00 and 00 15 00 the system will power the heater for 1 hour 173 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Airmar PB200 200WX PB200 Inputs lt none gt Outputs Dir Wind Direction degrees true Speed Wind Speed m s BP Barometric Pressure bar AT Air Temperature C RH Relative Humidity DP Dew Point C LAT Latitude LON Longitude Description The Airmar PB200 200WX sensor measures or calculates several meteorological parameters including wind speed wind direction barometric pressure air temperature relative humidity and dew point as well as GPS position LAT LON and UTC time The Xpert PB200 setup block enables you to read these parameters into the Xpert for further processing and or logging The following sections describe how to wire and configure the sensor for use with the Xpert Wiring Connect the PB200 200WX sensors to an RS232 or RS485 serial po
128. ating 104 preparing the XPert to work with XTerm 104 set clock 108 Upgrade 109 web server 109 XY Function block 221 226 XY Funct block 221 226 306 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com
129. ation 40 to 60 C Multiple sampling rates and digital filtering Ability to make resistance measurements without additional external resistors e Viewing the card from the front the plug assignments are as follows 4 Gli c 2 c ls c 4 c 5 6 sw IN c c Balsw 1 ic 3 se 5 TEE Bal G Ground Bat 12 volts out SwBat switched 12 volts out SwGnd switch to ground EX negated excitation voltage NC No Connections Differential channel pairs are 1 2 3 4 5 6 The higher voltage line goes to the odd line 260 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Specifications Parameter Min Typ Max Units Input 25 C 0 0015 IFS 40 C to 60 C 0 03 FS Ratiometric Error Pf 0 0015 FS CMRR ee fe 60Hz Rejection 100 ee Rin Single Ended 20 Meg Q Differential 20 Meg Q Common Mode 20 Meg Q Excitation Range so po fo Output Current Oo ooo o Ee mA Output Impedance juo lg Absolute Error 40 C to 60 C 0 03 FS Ratiometric Error Pf 0 005 WFS Frequency o dlo Hz Sensor Power VBAT from Data Logger Curent P00 Fina Protection Static Discharge a S 2000 Volts Conducted 400 Volts Error which will not cancel when two measurements are expressed as a ratio 2 The excitation outputs are connected internally to the analog to digital converter This value is the accuracy of thi
130. be retrieved and the current lease viewed with the IPCONFIG ALL command DHCP leases are usually managed automatically but this command can be used to verify that a connected router is assigning IP addresses reliably REPORT mode Set status reporting to on off none ssp 0 9 low medium high i2c all debug more below SET sensor value data Sets the current value of a tag to the specified data For tags with multiple possible values the value number may be specified 1 n Data may be an integer a floating point number or a double quoted string SHOW sensor list SENSORI TAG CSV YMODEM C The SHOW command by itself will display the current value for every sensor and tag that does not have a U quality in the system in a tabular report Sensors are the input blocks in the system Tags include any intermediate or final value in the setup marked with a ComsTag a custom tag created with Basic or a Field Variable e Specifying a sensor list will cause only those sensors and tags to be displayed sensors and tags can have the same name e SENSOR shows only sensors e TAG shows only tags e CSV will use a comma separated and quoted format that can be imported in to a spreadsheet CSV will also show more decimal places by default only 3 places are shown to help keep columns aligned e YMODEM will cause the report to be transferred using the Ymodem protocol as lt sitena
131. bort Get all setup files from the station ZIP them up and transfer them to your PC using the Ymodem protocol Flash Disk gt YMODEM SSF ZIP Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to abort 294 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com APPENDIX H DIMENSIONS XPERT2 DATA LOGGER Dimensions shown are in inches With supplied mounting feet 296 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com B 1 a DD 16 ane 7 LZ i 1 I E E With mounting feet removed 297 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com IO MODULES Dimensions shown are in inches Note that on the 8080 0007 module the two 6 32 screws located 3 00 inches apart on the rear of the module provide the earth grounding for the transient protection
132. cal Setup 1 0 Modules Lag files 0 a Dee Now the system displays that it has an EZSetup measurement defined and that a sensor has been placed into that measurement Adding more sensors to that measurement is done by selecting the New Sensor and repeating the previous steps selecting the appropriate sensor type IO module Channel etc Creating an additional EZSetup measurement to add hourly averages for example is done by selecting New Measurement and repeating the previous steps including adding what sensors to measure by this new schedule Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com REMEMBER defining a schedule does no good without defining the sensors below it So to add an hourly average of the QuadSE sensor previously setup on the fifteen minute interval Define a new EZSetup measurement this time setup the Measurement interval to hourly set the sampling interval to the desired time and set the number of samples If one minute interval is used number of samples could be set to 60 to take samples for the whole hour Add a new sensor with the same IO module and channel as previously defined to get the data from the same shaft encoder Check the box labeled AVG on the Sensor Configuration screen Once the setup is completed go to the main tab and press START recording The SSP log file does
133. cccsscsccicces asccicovsh eek ccvass sancaecSenduve sit aaea aaa Na E tee os a EAE Eeoa RAEE SAE EER An oaa OR 36 Sensor Confisurath om A esii reei o a aE REE AE A E E E E R E ie 37 Graphical Seep t orren eege asr ee E eae EE ESES aS o e a a oS Ee CESES O POES EAEn E SEE ESENS 40 VO M d l Semi Senee eee a o aa a a e a a R 41 Naming VO MGdules oiitivcecdetiver a r a R E E A A e E A A E aot aN RER 42 Resetin ge V O Modules 5 ccsececesesesdcyscsvvess teach devecetscshlesch EE EER a a ks 42 LAN Setting 3 52 et ccise Sy het ie a ES es ae Sat ee aad eS as O aed ad al 43 CrOSSOVEr Connection isi soins sensunces a Es dots saeextdedss delish svieesndide dedghsscnhied a a aa dedck eleven cadsdnndedeteseisndudce 44 iii Ti FICS yes cessehyitasouacseasteeseck sun chen secevsik bo ngoo baa E E A 44 Log Properes see n E T a ebed a Late TE A ERE E sha cad odes A eE AEAEE OE EAEE NL atid 45 SaR EE E R Ea OE E in aa oa wae Rha A AEE E E aa E aE Self Timed Dialog Append Lat Lon Self Timed Test Random Test in Satlink Status eioccs ea csrgicessetsc AA A A AAE oe Seasesteacevorgaceesseavibertedagensasteescdusaiceses crebunerdccuetsteenete SLE TES Es ois ech tee eget hess EE Stash eaves askance hens abaa abe ction thane ak E E A A Cl arg Me LOG AEE E E T E E TOE EE 66 Entering ANO a DE aE EE S EE E E DEE EET E EEN 66 EXPO a AAEE N EEE AE ETEA NE E EE OE E E EE EEE 67 STATUS TAB 3320 ER A E E S 69 USING STORAGE CARDS a e T T dete co
134. cesasescercetves cosh ve cost cosacsdebsvessunesenss jose sucbastesscobseescensseyss obsossephiseyssgedans 79 Adding Additional BIOCKS sa s s3 scvsicssssascehsseesscedassseescstveegs tens svetapseessebavasussavnss sadsen svete stesscebseascesosepabsebasuseebaseesseessee 80 Changing Block Propertiesi s onei i p A E Saati enh sere hoe seas gh Sapa seve ee Sees les eb ees 82 MODIFYING A SETUP DIA GRAM n iicesve Seosesnbonresheesenevsteoracties ER sdb seu E TESES R NER AER ES 85 Waring and UNWIN oso eel epee BR ee a tasted he ep eo Se ee ees 85 Deleting a Blocks ngauee ih Ae Ge pee ee A el a a nes ea ae a Ge eee 87 Deleting Multiple Blocks i4e 233 co ih eel ape e BAG ee hele ee ape eG eo eee 87 Insert A Blockin ih ies od eeg e Seen b eh sae esac ees Sanne auc cae eh das aa ba abd R bop nde Sev eee 88 CHAPTER 5 EXAMPLE SETUPS csscssssssssssssscssscssssssescssensssssnsssesscssosssssnsssssnesscsscssesssssssssnesssssessessessosees 91 EZSETUP FOR A STREAM GAUGING STATION s ssssssssssscssssssssecssvssavsvsscnsusssssessevasavavsssnsncasssesssossevaverssescusssvesossonaves 92 GRAPHICAL SETUP TO COMPUTE DAILY MIN MAX ccccscsssesscssesseseessessesesesecseessesesesessesssssessussscsesssessesssseseuensssesesenes 97 CHAPTER 6 OPERATION WITH A PC RUNNING XTERM sssesessesesececeesoroesesecoceesoroesesecoerororoesesesoeroroeseseceee 99 INTRODUCTION 3 ses eivegie satis a E A a R gr omueatetsevegeauaaauseiteacetes 100 iv Installing XT erin ss
135. che sense E ET E E eaae aara o EEEE EET ERE EEEE A E 71 Expand Log File Capa D ES er rre cb Tae aea tots nc coset sense ae er T raa TE S EEEE Eee OSPEK ESOR EIEE EESE Erie TESES 71 Upload Download STEL nn i o AEAEE AT E 72 Download log flegma techies scene soa scabs ee coed te ahs sued coecd dase dante etd th hd vasea steed sah se E E IEEE a ARE 72 CHAPTER 4 GRAPHICAL SETUP DIAGRAMS ssesseseseseesesorseseseccerororsesesecoeroroesesecoeoesoroesesecoerororoeseeesossosoeseseeeee 73 OVERVIEW rapere EEAO tage coed sed EEEE EE E O E e E spews ch EEE EE E E EEEE TOTE SS 74 AN EXAMPLE SETUP DIAGRA Motes iccicccsicksceasenicetcscvsncesevntenecvevsncuavenssnecbcssaneouaoinien cute cuevues tases suresnenneotebevern ures cosy 75 BOCK Cate S Oris voi fo osc i is sade cw cach edocs e EEEE EE E deeb ib Ge cease ted EE cela te kadecs su bece antes EEE ERORE E 75 Block Inputs and Outputs sinees enne eere ee ee noera ee e OKE rE See era EEEE sole OaE EOE SEE EREE E 75 Block Conmiectability sss sssiesc csecnpeetetcns chon aight cs senses ep evbunebevtcnpus o OKE EES EEOAE EEEE STUE se buscpacnetnabuedevensaneeipeoueyy 76 Active Blocks dnd P sbh P ll saei nenin e AEE aE EAE cca AEEA O AEE E E IEE EAE e 76 Block Placements rrenean E E EENE EEEE E AE Ea EE EE E ERE 77 BlOCK Properties E E E EE TS 77 CREATING A NEW SETUP DIAGRAM fE ra a AE a E aE I EES ETa APE EREE Eao aSa E is EA ER IR EEEE cosa Eai E 79 Adding a Sensor Using th Wizard o ssccsccsscc ss
136. ck the following block properties window comes up revealing the pressure units to be sampled the SDI address the averaging time and the temperature options Zrel Dg wire Add gt a SDI Address P 7 Cancel E Averaging Time 5 fi BB M Enable Temperature Celsius Fahrenheit Viewing the property windows for the other blocks in the setup can be viewed in a similar manner A full description of the properties for each block can be found in Appendix A Setup Blocks Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CREATING A NEW SETUP DIAGRAM Now that we have seen an example graphical setup let s see what it take to create a small one from scratch From the Setup tab highlight New and select Edit This will bring up a blank setup screen F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Let s say we ve just physically hooked up two sensors to our Xpert and want to add them to this new setup One is an RM Young wind sensor from which we want to log wind speed and wind direction and the other is a submersible pressure sensor from which we want to measure water depth Adding a Sensor Using the Wizard Click the Add button to add the first sensor The following screen will come up F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Select Category aoe er Pi E Lr Low P This screen shows the diffe
137. ck in the Setup Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Q This is an indication of the quality of the data It is set to G good or B bad by the input module making the measurement Other modules processing the data can also modify this quality Units These are the units for the measurement The units are generally set by the Sensor block in the Setup Diagram but can sometimes be determined by a Processing block Date This is the date for the timestamp It is displayed in the format selected by Set Date Time in the Main tab Because of the small screen size the column for the date is hidden Use the scroll bar to see the date Selecting Log File Use the pull down menu next to Select Log to show all the log files in the system that are available for viewing Log files are created modified and deleted under the Setup tab To change what sensor data gets directed to a certain log the properties for that log must be modified in the Setup screen Navigating the Log The log file can be navigated either with the scroll bars on the sides of the Log window or with the buttons at the bottom of the display Day Day The buttons Day and Day can be used to jump ahead or back one day s worth of data Find The Find button can be used to search for the data logged near a certain date and time Clearing the Log Pressing thi
138. clock will keep time accurate to ten seconds a month over the temperature range of 40 to 60 C The date and time is maintained even after power is removed from the system by a lithium coin cell battery NOTE On Satlink systems with self timed transmissions enabled the system will synchronize its clock to the Satlink periodically maintaining higher clock accuracy To change the date or time press the button to bring up the Set Date Time window shown below Use the stylus or the lt lt or gt gt buttons to move from one field to the next and use the numbers in the virtual keypad to enter the new value The values in the field can also be incremented or decremented via the and buttons Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Specify Date Time Date Time Year Month Day Hour Min pos fo fs fo This value is currently highlighted Use keypad or to change the value Sec Ea aag HAA E Use this to highlight the value to the left or right lt lt gt gt Cancel Station Name The station name is the general purpose identifier for the station It can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters This name does not need to be the same as the GOES METEOSAT identifier but is used when connecting into a SSP system as the slave station name When communicating to other stations
139. contrast while the lt button decreases it Note This contrast adjustment has no affect on the XTerm program adjusting it from Xterm will affect the LCD though Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Battery Voltage The Battery Voltage status area displays the supply voltage next Ext This value is measured and updated every 5 minutes The internal lithium clock battery should be replaced every 5 years This battery is only used for preserving date and time when power is removed from the system If on power up the system detects that it has lost the date and time it will set the date to 1 1 1984 No other operating parameters are preserved by this battery See Common Maintenance and troubleshooting for information on changing the battery Logout Pressing Logout will re display the login screen and turn off the display You will need to touch the screen again to turn on the display If using Xterm the connection to the unit is not shut down on a logout Close XTerm by pressing the X in the upper right hand corner to ensure the remote system can go into its lowest power mode Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SETUP TAB The setup tab allows for viewing and editing system settings The items shown in the setup tab will vary dependi
140. d be provided with external resistors Stronger biasing can be achieved by placing a 100K resistor from the COM9 pin2 data line to GND and another 100K resistor from the COM9 pin3 data line to 12V NOTE In this case the com port settings in the Coms SSP CL section of setup should be left as none Coms SSP CL is strictly for configuring SSP and Command Line communication devices e g Modem Voice Modem Radio SSP and Direct Redirecting SDI to COM9 on an 8080 0000 3B To redirect SDI 12 to COM9 the XPERT EXE program must be run with the SDI COM9 command line parameter To do this edit the autoexec bat to look like this Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com flash disk remote exe coml 115200 flash disk xpert exe SDI COM9 Note Be sure to include the colon after the 9 NOTE Once the Xpert application has been configured this way ALL SDI 12 sensors will use COMO for communicating Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 3 Operating the Xpert This chapter describes how to operate the Xpert using its graphical user interface GUD If the Xpert has a touch screen display the GUI is available on the front of the Xpert If the Xpert does not have a touch screen then a PC running XTerm must be used to get acces
141. d so far it will be blank if none have yet been added From here an account can be added modified or deleted The columns provide a summary of the settings including the name group timeout and the access rights that have been permitted In the screen below Susan has been placed in the data Retrieval user group She may leave the unit inactive for 1 minute before it will time out She has been granted access rights to the Command line and Gui Franco has been placed in the Setup user group and hence is allowed to change the setup upgrade the unit transfer files etc He may leave the unit inactive for up to 10 minutes before his session will timeout He has been granted access rights to the Command line Gui and he may access the unit via TCP IP LAN Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CG Retrieval Setup CTG Delete Close Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Pressing New or Edit brings up a user properties window This window has blanks for user name password user group access rights and a timeout If no password is desired for that user simply leave the password spaces blank The user group determines what sort of access the user is allowed Normally either Retrieval and Setup access are selectable but Custom groups ma
142. d to counters Shaft encoders are not filtered The digital filters are up down counters that count between 0 and a user defined threshold value Each input line s filter can have a different threshold value The input to a filter is one of the eight input lines the output feeds a 32 bit counter The filter counts up at each sample interval when its input is a one and down when its input is a zero The counter will not count up if it is at its upper threshold and it won t count down when its count is zero The output of the of the filter only changes state when the counter reaches zero or its upper threshold Thus if the output state of the filter is a one it will stay a one until the counter reaches zero It will then remain zero until the counter counts up to its upper threshold Valid digital filter time constants are 1 to 255 Counters Up to eight 32 bit counters can be programmed to count on both edges or just the positive going edge of their respective inputs Since the input to the counter can be inverted under program control the counter can also be made to count on the negative going edge by inverting its input The counter alarm message can be set to be sent after 1 to 255 counts Frequency The time is logged for each counter every time it counts This time is reported for each counter when the counters are read Frequency can be measured by reading the counters twice and computing the difference in time and counts Shaft encode
143. d you like to set the Xpert s time to match your PC If you press YES the Xpert s clock will be set to match the PC clock Press NO if you do not wish the time to be set 108 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Connect Pressing the Connect button brings up the configuration dialog shown and described in the section on installing XTerm This allows you to change your connection once XTerm has been started Upgrade Pressing the Upgrade button brings up a dialog asking for the location of the upgrade file to use to perform a scripted upgrade of the firmware in the 9210 Please see Appendix B for more information on how to upgrade Web Server The Web Server check box selects whether or not XTerm should act as a web server proxy for the Xpert When this box is checked any web pages on the Xpert will be made available as if they were actually hosted on your PC For instance in Internet Explorer you could enter the URL http localhost to access the Xpert s homepage If your PC is on a LAN WAN or the Internet then the Xpert s home page can be reached by other users by entering http your PorURL Regardless of the setting of this box XTerm always acts as a proxy for other XTerm users on the network For instance you can test this out by starting a second copy of XTerm with the following command XTerm remote localhost or from another
144. dbees 8 SIENDO TKS A LKA i 1 RAPE PEE E E E E E E E E E E dis 8 Common Optional Items oiire onee eeren E OEE EE EEEE OS AEE TAE EE EES EE EEEE EEE 8 Other Optional Items soiree onis CE ARR AGREE AE UN RA ee LEER aie ek oie 8 INTTTAT CHECKOUT oreen t oa ee coiees coetoaleucebigtacsssorddetcacusesinsontuatevedeecndennesebeben an EEEE EAS EENE E EAAS E E EE 9 Powering U Pea Qn Seis ai a aude CE AR MN AGU REE RS EE oR Be LL Rn EO EERE 9 Adjust the Contrast optional seereis onnee deeds cosesmencebyesebevbeongnouitossnsvencuebundensonsulecnepechdusebavsesnenvedyssebeedecenssvndes 9 Verify Touchscreen and Display Work 00 ceecececesecseecseeeseeeeeeeseeccesecsecaecsaecsaecseecaeseneseaeeeeeeseaeessecsaecaessaesaes 9 Verity X Term Works oeeie rena seh nonis eoe duels cane eecucelaceebeuhe cu E bese suet bn deuschuntecgcbuoh ubdbarseupensadysecneude cous cendes 9 Verify lO Modules Work siioni onsena Te Recto eck rE O EE oaeo RE rE s eaS OEE E E SESEO EEO EES ats conces 9 Optional SEL LIbTA ry eeen peere eee ea aE SEEE E E EE ESA EESE ENE o E aS E EE EASE SEE EEES ESEE SE i EEO TES ES 10 PREPARING FOR SETUP ie oiiro toernee anian ere noet aE Oea Ea rE EENET NE S ENNEN PEO siveuneaevtee decevetbevseredededesssnvndsstvnee 14 Analyze the SYSLOM rr a e E E e E E a E ESSEE E AREA eSI SEES ITEN EESE aE 14 Choosing the Right B OEE e ae erae E a aE E e a aP aE OTS S EES IE EAP E a EESE EENS 14 SDI 12 Sensors over RS 485 port on an 8080 0000 3B e ssssessesss
145. dd gt Exit k The properties window for either of these FieldVar blocks looks like this Select Field Variables Internal Name Public Name Interval Cancel _ Time Label Listed are the two modifiable properties for the Measure block To add Interval to our View Data tab check the box next to Interval Then click on the word Interval to select it and click Label to give this property a Public Name For this example assign the name BP Interval Public Name must be unique in the system in order to uniquely identify the referenced property If no Public Name is specified it defaults to Internal Name when OK is pressed but will display an error if that name is not unique To continue this example click OK and then follow the same procedure with the other Measure block to assign its interval a Public Name of SR Interval Now when we exit the Setup screen and go back to the Data tab we see the two interval properties for our measure blocks as shown below Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status BP INTERVAL 00 15 00 SRINTERVAL 00 15 00 Refresh Meas Change To change either property simply select the one to modify and click Change to enter a new value Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LOG TAB The Log window is used to display data from a lo
146. de in the self timed transmission This value is used for the BIN INT transmission format to set the number of values to send for each sensor e g if set to 32 and 4 sensors are sending data then a total of 128 data values are sent other formats will use the NUM VALUES defined in the self timed blocks entered into the setup The Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com number entered here will also set the default value when placing a self timed block into the setup Format Support for several standard formats is included The supported formats are e SHEF format conforms to NESDIS Standard Decimal format specifications The format is ASCII and readable by persons without the aid of a computer e SHEF Fixed is a special version of the SHEF format where numbers are fixed to seven decimal points Receive sites that handle messages with variable length data can use this format e Bin Int is a binary interleaved format identical to the 8210 binary transmission format The data are in the 6 bit pseudo binary format required by NESDIS e Bin NonInt is a binary non interleaved format This format also uses the 6 bit pseudo binary format but allows different amounts of data to be sent for each sensor The data is not interleaved i e one sensor s data set appears together in the transmission NOS conforms to NOS requireme
147. describes how the Xpert WavProc block is set up for Wave height parameter estimation 221 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The WavProc block is typically connected to an SDI 12 sensor block configured to measure the Sutron Radar Level Recorder SDI 12 WawProc The acquisition characteristics of WavProc block are defined using the WaveProc Properties dialog as seen in the illustration below The Interval property defines how often to run and typically should be no less than every hour 01 00 00 The Time property allows you to specify an offset for the interval Note sample duration is fixed to 2400 samples or 34 minutes 8 seconds WavProc Properties Sensor Time Interval Use the WavProc Files dialog to specify where to save the Time Domain sensor input data and Spectrum domain output data An archive directory can be defined to host all the data files Note the most recent files are overwritten every measurement Interval whereas the archive directory stores all files generated WavProc Files V Custom most recent df file name Flash Disk WaveData txt Jai Cancel M Custom most recent sf file name Survey Flash Disk WvaveSpec tit M so Card wWayProac il 222 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel
148. details shown for each measurement include sensor name channel usage last data value and quality quality only if it is bad and scheduling information including the time of the next measurement m Ld Selecting a measurement sub branch and pressing Edit will cause the system to display the measurement graphically i e in terms of the blocks that define it Only the blocks of the measurement selected will be displayed Press the View button to view the block diagram in read only mode To display the blocks of all measurements that have been defined graphically select the Graphical Setup branch and press Edit To define a new measurement graphically select New and press Edit This causes the system to display the graphical setup page with no blocks yet defined To remove an entire graphical block chain click it click EDIT and then click the left most block and do a delete right 1 0 Modules The I O modules branch displays the I O modules currently connected to the system These modules are used for hooking up all sensors to the system except SDI 12 sensors Up to ten modules can be connected together and then plugged into the I2C port at the bottom of the logger Specific details on individual modules can be found in Appendix C If you select an I O module in the Setup tab and press Edit the following dialog will appear This dialog gives the serial number of the I O module its name and its I2C address Only
149. dialog The setting will appear only when the selected sensor type supports the property For example when the sensor type is ADC the Module and Channel properties are shown in the Sensor Configuration dialog as well as on the dialog that appears once More is clicked Note Most sensors have many more important settings than can be shown on the EzSetup Sensor Configuration dialog The additional settings are accessed by pressing More PARAMETER Appears when a sensor has more than one possible output For instance an AT RH sensor has both an air temperature and a relative humidity output Select the one to measure Multi Output Sensors Several sensors have more than one output parameter to select for measurement For example the SDI 12 sensor offers output parameters 1 through 20 the RMYoung and GillWind sensors offer output parameters Speed and Dir and the Counter sensor provides Count DeltaCount and Freq output parameters When a sensor with multiple outputs is selected in the Sensor Configuration dialog the dialog allows the user to select the output parameter to use see Parameter in the dialog below Sensor Configuration Name ws o o fe Sensor RMYoung 7 More Cancel M Log C Avg Dfpsr DSF saT D sT ORo com rac Oem rt vigits B f value JONKNO modue To Slope Poo a chame o Offset boo l Parameter Speed_ 7 When you want to measu
150. ds This calculation is done every Smpl Intvl If the sensor connected to the block has output units of W m2 the output of the block will be WHr M72 So the block adds the dimension of Hr to the units of sensor it is connected to The desired units are set by the Units property field The Acc Thrshld Accumulator Threshold sets the threshold for accumulating solar radiation data If the input value is less than this threshold the data will be ignored Some sensors have a slightly negative or positive output value in low light conditions The AccThrshld will ignore this data in the calculation The Sunshine calculation computes the amount of time that the input is greater than the hour threshold hr thrshld The calculation is simply If sample gt hr_thrshld then HrAccum HrAccum smpl_intvl 3600 smpl_intvl in seconds Hr Thrshld is typically set to 120 watts m2 as set by the WMO If the input is in other units the threshold value will probably be different from 120 217 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Time Interval Smp Intvl Acc Thrshid Hr Thrshid Units 218 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Vector Average VectAvg Inputs Speed Outputs Mean Speed Scalar This is the scalar wind speed not taking dir
151. dules will help with the understanding of this powerful block Analog Input Properties AIO Mod F 7 Meas Type l 3 7 Filter Notch SM Settling Time lt o a te Exc Chan Units Exc Volts Offset TT HATE Differential Slope s Aw The block scales the outputs according to the values of Slope and Offset using the equation output reading slope offset The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors page For the calibration the user will enter the current value sensor The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained To setup a sensor with the Analog block first select the Analog I O module to use Then select what is to be measured under Measurement Voltage This is for performing standard analog voltage measurements similar to what could be done with the VoltMeter block It requires one input channel for a single ended measurement or an input channel pair for a differential measurement 139 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Current 4 20mA This is for making current measurements in the range of 0 to 20ma It requires one input channel for a single ended measurement or an input channel pair for a differential measurement The dialog changes slightly when this measur
152. e Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com If you wish to test this you can go to the Setup menu on the Xpert select Coms SSP CL press Edit press Test and click Send Mail Port com1 7 File Transfer Good Total Set Clock js jas Connect _ 1994 ps Upgrade Key Check Mail Status Unkey IV Web Server IV Auto Update Rx TX Send Mail This will prompt for a mail message to send to an Xpert If successful Mail Delivered will be displayed Decoder This is an SSP message decoder that can be helpful for trouble shooting SSP communication problems The information displayed requires an understanding of the SSP protocol which is beyond the scope of this manual However if you experience some sort of repeatable communication failure a screen capture of the Decoder window can very helpful to Sutron support staff in figuring out what s going wrong E SSP Message Decoder f eax 13 08 59 PC x ScreenReg 5 13 08 59 XP Screen2 6006 3 13 08 59 xP VersionInfo 8 3 1 0 4 13 08 59 PC 3870643 ScreenDetect 5 3 30 Special Command Line Options XTerm supports some special options which are not configurable through the CONNECT screen and must be passed on the command line NOHS disables H W Handshaking flow control allowing Xterm to be used over a 3 line serial port STATS causes the Communication
153. e a deadband so that the output won t change from 0 to 1 until the input reaches 41 C and the output won t change from 1 to 0 until the output reaches 39 C We would set Set Point to 40 Deadband to 1 and Trigger to Above Set Point Properties Set Point E bas Deadband o Cancel Trigger Above Below 216 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com amp Solar Radiation Accumulator SRAcc Inputs SolRad Outputs Accumulation Accum Sunshine HrsSun Description This block is designed to do the measurement and processing of data from a solar radiation sensor in order to compute the accumulated value and duration of sunshine The user set properties of time interval and sample interval Smpl Intv1 control the execution of the block Sample Interval sets how often the block will ask for data from the block connected to it Typically this block will be a solar radiation block but it can also be a voltage block or any other input processing block that is not scheduled The Time and Interval control when the accumulator is reset back to 0 With an interval of 24 00 00 and a time of 00 00 00 the accumulator would be reset every 24 hours at midnight Hourly resets or resets at times other than midnight are also possible The basic computation of the block is Accum Accum sample smpl_intvl 3600 smpl_intvl in secon
154. e any sense if it were passed into all the blocks that followed it because additional processing was done to get computed values that are no longer just the level Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 6 Operation with a PC running XTerm Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com INTRODUCTION Sutron has designed the Xpert so that a Windows based personal computer PC running its XTerm program can setup and operate an Xpert without using the front panel This is a necessity for Xperts that do not have a touch screen display XTerm supports several connection methods and so can be used to access remote Xperts e g those connected by modem This section describes how to use XTerm to communicate with an Xpert Sutron provides two versions of XTerm One version is intended for desktop PCs running Microsoft Windows The other version is intended for PocketPC devices like the HP iPaq and Dell Axim The two programs perform essentially the same functions with the biggest difference being that XTerm for the PocketPC displays the Xpert screen rotated 90 degrees XTerm does this because the aspect ratio of the PocketPC screen is the same as the Xperts except rotated This ensures the user can see the Xpert screen with maximum resolution Installing XTerm
155. e comms devices RADIO2 and MODEM3 have been defined Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status H Basic E Coms SSP CL RADIOZ MODEMS E2Setup Measurements Graphical Setup I O Modules LAN Settings Log files 7 To access the configuration settings for one of these devices simply highlight the device in the tree and press the Edit button This will bring up the config settings that are specific to the device selected which are described in the following sections E EE E Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Direct Connect Settings This dialog is used to configure the alarm and alert settings for the direct connection Direct Connect Settings Tx Normal Rate 00 00 00 e Tx Alarm Rate 00 00 00 kel Disable Alerts 00 00 00 will disable a Tx Tx Normal Rate is the rate at which alarms are transmitted when no sensors are in alarm and Tx Alarm Rate is the rate used when a sensor is in alarm They can be set to 00 00 00 to inhibit timed alarm transmissions Disable Alerts may be checked to prevent messages to be sent out the port when the system enters the alert state Direct connections support two types of alarm messages If SSP is detected an SSP alarm is sent otherwise a simple text message is sent and a prompt is made asking for the alarm t
156. e has emptied and adds 5 slope to the sensor offset The value reported by the block is always reading offset Note You must get data from the CapRain block every 10 to 15 minutes so it can track the emptying The maximum rain rate that can be handled by measurements every 10 minutes is 12 inches hour and the maximum rate handled by measurements every 15 minutes is 8 inches hour The block supports the calibration to a use entered current value When the calibration function is run the system prompts for the current level It then uses the current level and the current reading to automatically set the offset The calibration function should not be done when the system is emptying the gauge or while the gauge output is changing Enter the slope in the units that you desire The slope for inches would be 0 5 2 5inches Svolts The slope for mm would be 10 50mm 5 The offset should normally be 0 for a new site with an empty gauge As explained above the offset can also be computed to force the gauge to a specific value The units should be set to in or mm as determined by the slope 149 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Analog 1 0 Module Input Channel Slope Offset fo Units 150 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com fons Constant
157. e input channel is Vi GND Thermistor 3 wire Connect the thermistor or any resistance device as follows The excitation channel is Vx The input channel is Vi Vx GND Thermistor 4 wire Select differential measurement set the excitation channel to be different from the input channel Connect one end of the resistor to excitation channel and input channel CH1 CH3 or CH5 using separate wires Connect the other end of the resistor to an input channel CH2 CH4 or CH6 and GND using separate wires Connect the sensor to channels 1 2 3 4 etc as selected for a differential measurement Connect the sensor as shown below Vx Vit VI GND 138 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Double Volts DoubleVolts is intended for making ratiometric measurements for a potentiometer and other similar ratiometric devices The output value is the ratio of Vi Vx Since both Vi and Vx are measured the measurement is called DoubleVolts Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Vx lt GND Description The Analog block is a general purpose setup block for making voltage current resistance or thermistor resistance measurements from an Analog I O Module One analog output and or one analog input can be setup with each Analog block Reading the information on the Analog I O Module in Appendix C I O Mo
158. e is set high for 25 seconds and then set low After Pulse Time seconds elapses the Stop output is set high for 25 seconds and then set low When Latched Outputs is not checked the selected move line stays high for the duration specified by Pulse Time before it is set low The Stop output is not set in this case The nvert Outputs option is used to invert the sense of the control loop The normal sense occurs when the box is not checked In this case Move is selected when the input Point is lower than Set Point by more than Deadband Move is selected when the input Point is higher than Set Point by more than Deadband When the Invert Outputs option is checked Move is selected instead of Move and vice versa 215 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Set Point Control SetPoint Inputs Level Outputs Control Description This block compares the values coming in on its input with Set Point and outputs a 1 or 0 depending if the condition under Trigger is met The Deadband allows hysteresis to be added so that the output will not keep change unless the input moves away from the Set Point by a meaningful amount This block implements a function similar to that of a household thermostat For example say we want to output a value of 1 if the input from an Air Temp sensor block crosses 40 C except that we want there to b
159. e out if your settings will produce the desired result Calibrate The tipping bucket block contains a calibrate procedure The calibrate procedure is used to set the reading to a user set value or to run a calibration test This is important to do whenever the Xpert is restarted The calibration procedure is run from the Sensors tab Calibrate button Live Tips 0 00 When the calibration is entered the old value of the tipping bucket is preserved and is locked This means that if recording is still on and the system measures or logs the tipping bucket the old value is used The Live Tips display always starts out initially at zero and updates very rapidly It will increment as the tipping bucket tips You may enter a new value by pressing the button To restore the old value and return to normal operations at any time just press the cancel button To accept the displayed value and make it become the new value press the OK button To test the tipping bucket enter the calibration screen add a specific amount of water to the tipping bucket and observe the read out Press cancel when done To correct the tipping bucket enter the calibration screen press the button and enter the correct value Press ok when done 193 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com An Volt Meter VoltMeter Inputs lt none gt
160. e reading of the sensor to which the Coms Tag is connected see Note below and Change alters the current value for the value that is displayed Change will also kickback the value to blocks to which it is connected e g if a Coms Tag is connected to a Constant Block you can use change to alter the value of the constant When the current selection is a FieldVar Measure has no effect and Change changes the value of the displayed property Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status AT 74 33 RH 23 21 Refresh E Change Note Coms Tag blocks can only measure sensors with which they are inline if there are no active blocks between the Coms Tag and sensor block Generally speaking this means the Coms Tag must be connected after the sensor block and before any Measure Average or other active block an active block is one that initiates a measurement and typically has a darkened border in the graphical setup The FieldVar setup block in conjunction with the Data tab provides a way to access often changed properties from multiple blocks in the setup in one convenient place To understand FieldVars some knowledge of the way the Xpert is set up is needed The graphical setup is discussed in detail in the next chapter but for the purposes of this discussion let s look at a sample setup screen Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Te
161. e specified communication port i e SSP4 289 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com would show messages to from COM4 If SSPO is specified then SSP messages transported by TCP IP are displayed Low Error messages Medium Error and warning messages High Error warning and status messages All or On Debug error warning status and SSP messages from serial ports 1 through 9 Debug Debug error warning and status messages I2C Decoded I2C messages The SSP Decoder displays the time of a message the source and destination the sequence number the operation code the size of the message and partial decoding of the contents of the message SSP Decoder Example Flash Disk gt report SSP2 7 16 38 COM2 RTU gt XCONNECT 4865191 TimeTag 16 09 18 2006 4 00 String BAT Real 12 529999 TimeTag 20 09 18 2006 00 String AirTemp Real 72 799988 TimeTagEnd 0 2 39 COM2 XCONNECT gt RTU 11720692 Ack 1 TimeTagEnd 2 39 COM2 XCONNECT gt RTU 11720942 SetClock 6 09 19 2006 17 16 42 2 45 COM2 XCONNECT gt RTU 11721942 CurdataReq 0 17 16 45 COM2 RTU gt XCONNECT 4871422 Curdata 30 BAT 2 0 Nil 1 Alarm OK yp rey ee ES E E AMOAH ABOUT Command Example Flash Disk gt ABOUT
162. ecent messages and prompts issued by the data logger This can be helpful in determining why the upgrade failed A longer version of this history is also copied in to the clipboard If you cannot determine the source of the problem you can edit paste this information in to an email message explaining the problem and send it to Sutron Customer Service Customizing a Serial Ethernet Upgrade Users can make their own upgrade files or edit the ones provided by Sutron depending on individual needs The upgrade file is a simple ASCII file such that it can be edited with notepad exe An example upgrade file is shown below To save space the many steps required to delete all potential custom slls and to send all possible speech files have been left out The following command tells XTerm this is an Xpert2 upgrade script x Reboot Xpert2 bypassing autoexec bat b bypass Remove old programs If any other files need to be deleted befor the new files are deployed then add them to this list A typical example would be an sll file you have written for Xpert2 Basic sli Coms sli DefLib sll Engine dll Ezsetup sll Logger dl VW LogMgr d11 LZO d11 Remote exe Satlink sll SDI d a Utils dia Xpert exe Windows Basic s1ll1 Windows Coms s11 Windows DefLib sl1 Windows Engine dll aBaAaaaaaaadaiaaaaaaaa 253 Br
163. ection into account The scalar average of 10mph for an hour and 20mph for an hour is 15mph regardless of changing direction Mean Magnitude Unit This is the vector average of the wind speed using a unit vector The mean magnitude unit of Smph at 0 for 1 hour and 100mph at 180 for 1 hours is Omph because two unit vector pointing opposite directions cancel when added with vector addition Mean Magnitude Wind This is the vector average of the wind speed which takes direction into account Here the average of 10mph at 0 for 1 hour and 20mph at 180 for 1 hour is negative S5mph Mean Direction Unit This is the wind direction in degrees not weighted for wind speed Here the average of 10mph at 0 with 20mph at 90 is 45 Mean Direction Wind This is the wind direction in degrees weighted for wind speed Here the average of 10mph at 0 with 100mph at 90 is 84 STD Speed Scalar This is the standard deviation of the scalar wind speed STD Direction Unit This is the standard deviation of the direction unit STD Direction Wind This is the standard deviation of the direction wind Min Speed Scalar This is the minimum of the scalar wind speed Max Speed Scalar This is the maximum of the scalar wind speed Max Direction This is the direction taken at the time the max speed is detected Count This is the number of samples that have been taken Description The Vector Average block i
164. ed outputs of the RMYoung sensor are linked One measurement of the sensor will be made every 15 minutes to obtain both values Dir and Speed The same is the case for the GillWind sensor on COM4 However the GillWind sensor on COMS does not have its outputs linked This would happen if for example the Speed sensor entry was created with the selection of COM7 and then changed to COM6 to match the Dir entry amp 01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 amp RMYoung AI0 1 Ch 1 01 WD Dir 02 WS Speed B GillWind COM4 03 WD Dir 04 WS Speed 05 Dir COM6 06 Speed COM6 Once outputs are linked a change to one will affect all linked outputs Using the above as an example if you select the GillWind Dir entry and change its com port to COM3 it will change for the Speed setting as well Once an output has been linked you must delete the entry to unlink it Hence to fix the fact that the Speed output of the GillWind sensor on COM6 is not linked to the Dir output you would first delete the Speed entry and then re add it making sure to set the com port setting to COM6 in the process Event Driven Sensors The vast majority of sensors measure when told to i e according to the measurement schedule you define The exception to this rule occurs when using a sensor with an Event option checked like BinIn Every time an Event occurs the entire set of sensors defined under the measurement schedule will be measured F
165. edition 2006 Block Placement The Dew Point block should typically come BEFORE the measure or average or other active block that executes it This ensures the block operates on data from the same measurement frame and avoids odd side effects that come from active blocks operating on split paths 204 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DQAP Quality Controlled Average Inputs Input Outputs Average Computes the quality controlled average mean value of the samples taken during the Duration STD Computes the quality controlled standard deviation of the samples taken during the Duration Count Outputs the number of samples that were collected The number of samples used in the output average is the Count minus the Outliers Outliers Outputs the number of samples that were greater than three standard deviations from the initial sample mean Description The DQAP block is a special modification of the Average block The Average block is a Measure block that can output the maximum minimum average standard deviation and sample count from a series of data points sampled from a sensor The DQAP block also computes the average and outputs it along with the standard deviation and sample count The difference is in the way the average and standard deviation are computed The DQAP block makes use of statistical qu
166. eeds to be processed for daily minimum maximums So a special block is needed this block has already been defined and is provided in the default Xpert library had it not been included it would need to be developed either by Sutron or by using the software development kit Once the measurements have been defined and the associated blocks needed to do the measurements have been identified it is time to start building the setup Below is the result of building the Graphical setup block by block starting at the left This was done without the use of the wizard since multiple outputs and blocks were needed Here is the graphical setup Display MaxTime It may look complicated at first but by looking at it piece by piece it will make sense Note that in the graphical setup data is flowing from left to right So in the above example At the far left is where the data is connected an analog channel measured by a VDC block Next is a display block this tells the system to display all data that passes through this point last measured value in this case Not only is the data displayed but it is also logged by placing a log block directly after the display The log could be placed before the display but anytime a measurement is forced from the front panel it would be logged Next is the measure block This tells the system how often to take readings Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Su
167. een each redial attempt The Data Modem connection support two types of alarm messages If a PC Base station is detected an SSP alarm is sent otherwise a simple text message is sent and a prompt is made asking for the alarm to be acknowledged Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com EzSetup Measurements EZSetup is used to define simple sensors based on a measurement interval Sensors configured here may be measured or averaged on a regular interval have a simple slope and offset applied displayed on the front panel transmitted via Satlink or modem and be used to identify alarm conditions It is possible to configure an entire station using only this section for sensors if no special processing is needed Measurements that are set up in EzSetup work in parallel with measurements set up in the Graphical Setup Hence one popular practice is to set up simple sensor configurations in EzSetup and more complicated sensor configurations in Graphical Setup Main Setup Sensors Log Status E EZSetup Measurements 3 01 00 15 00 Next 11 15 00 01 AirTemp AIO 1 Ch 1 15 6 F 02 TipBekt DIO 1 Ch 1 0 MM New Sensor amp 02 01 00 00 Next 12 00 00 01 BattVolt 13 08 V New Sensor New Measurement iy EzSetup organizes sensors by measurement schedule similar to the way the 8210 data logger w
168. een reserved for placing and connecting setup blocks From this screen we can get a quick view of where data is coming from how it is getting sampled and processed and where it is going Below for example we see A parameter from the barometric pressure sensor is being periodically sampled and its maximum or minimum being stored to a log at some rate and Solar radiation is being regularly sampled logged and periodically transmitted via satellite to a main station F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit BP PEP bani E Max Barom Measure MinMax Pt Block Categories Setup blocks come in general categories Input Processing Logging Telemetry Miscellaneous and Output Four of these types of block are represented above On the left are the input blocks representing barometric pressure and solar radiation sensors hooked to the system Next to them are the Measure and MinMax processing blocks which request and or perform operations on the data from the sensor blocks Note how these two blocks have darkened borders This is an indication that the block is active i e that it initiates data flow through a chain of blocks After the Measure and MinMax blocks come two log blocks which indicate where the data is being stored Finally there is a telemetry block which indicates how the data is being transmitted Blocks of a certain type are not restricted to a particular column in the display but data does always flow
169. eft PocketPC shown right If you cancel this dialog then Xpert prompts for the destination on the Xpert disk the file should be saved Tr ie Lg XTermCOM1 115200 2 32 Save As Name EST Folder Poe y4 Type txt v Location Main memory v pala sel efoto je File name TEST tat Save as type z Cancel T Open as read only File Transfer File Transfer is one of the more powerful features of XTerm Using File Transfer you can transfer setups and software between the Xpert and your PC You can also access special virtual files in the Xpert that describe details about the software that is running When you select File Transfer you will see a window similar to the following desktop PC shown left PocketPC shown right xi fglxtermcomi 115200 44 2 53 QD PC Files c L Pert Files Flash Disk PC My Documents w Business lt DIR gt 01 01 20 dal Personal lt DIR gt 01 01 20 Templates lt DIR gt 01 01 20 J 2002 12 13 csv 4725035 12 13 200 Note1 pwi 438 12 02 20d La lt DIR gt J lt DIR gt english lt DIR gt 05 16 2002 16 39 autoexec bat 71 11 14 2002 10 18 Coms sll 133120 12 20 2002 13 17 1 data log 2048 12 20 2002 08 52 1 DefLib sll 462336 12 20 2002 13 17 Engine dll 157184 12 20 2002 13 1 l C Logger di Select All LogMar d Delete L20 dll Get From Xpert Modems Run A MRL70Q v 0 2002 08 47 NIFC sll 56320 12
170. elay before making its first measurement If the specified warm up delay is less than 3 sampling periods the delay before the first reading is taken will be 3 sampling periods This should be taken into account when computing the warm up delay Accuracy The ADC will self calibrate to its internal reference whenever the calibrate command is received The reference while very stable is accurate to 1mV This error is measured during factory test and is written into the ADC ROM A read Vref error command can be used to read this error and use it to obtain 0 0015 error at 25 C Another set of coefficients can be read to calibrate readings when the ADC gain is set to 16 263 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Example Configurations Using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module L dare I ma O L hma S Single Ended Voltage 4 20ma Current Measurement Measurement Example Four Wire Thermistor Example Measurement Example Two Wire Resistance Four Wire Resistance Sourced Cii e t Measurement Measurement Example Measurement Example Four Wire Bridge Two Wire Thermistor Voltage Measurement Measurement Example Example Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 264 Sutron Corporati
171. ement type is selected Analog Input Properties AIO Mod F v Meas Type i 1 7 Filter Notch Settling Time e P mm 3 D Units eE 100 Ie PL el Differential Slope Cancel s When measuring using an Xpert AIO module make sure 8080 0003 is checked this option is typically only used on the Xlite 9210 DC resistance To measure resistance set up an excitation channel and hook the device or medium to be measured between this channel and ground The I O module will do a voltage over current calculation to determine the resistance The excitation voltage should be set to a value appropriate to the approximate resistance being measured DC resistance uses a built in precision 20 ohm resistor as the reference for the resistance measurement AC resistance If this is selected the I O module will take two measurements for every measurement value the block outputs The first measurement is done using the voltage specified by the excitation voltage and the second with this voltage negated This can be used in cases where applying a DC excitation voltage would causes undesirable changes to the medium being measured Thermistor This is a specialized resistance measurement geared for thermistors A 10k internal resister is used instead of the standard and the excitation channel voltage is overridden to be 5V The output is the thermistor s resistance If the desired output is temperature then please
172. enefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com information If the unit is configured under the COMS SSP CL menu to send data at an ALARM interval anything other than 00 00 00 the unit will continue sending out that data Note Iridium and GPRS devices are not managed under the COMS SSP CL menu and are not subject to the ALARM interval Alarm Properties Enable Hi Alarm Enable Low Alarm 7 Hi Limit po Low Limit fb a Hi Mode jOff vj Low Mode bor x ROC Mode Off v ROC Fixed Interval M Roci P e Alert on ROC Alarm 7 Deadband ob Cancel Hi Alarm Go into alarm if the input value is gt Hi Limit deadband Go out of alarm if the input value is lt Hi Limit deadband Low Alarm Go into alarm if the input value is lt Low Limit deadband Go out of alarm if the input value is gt Low Limit deadband Rate Of 1 When ROC Mode is set to Off no ROC alarm test occurs Change Alarm 2 When ROC Mode is set to Hi the system goes into alarm if the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband 3 When ROC Mode is set to Low the system goes into alarm if the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband 4 T
173. ensor Block Example Now that all the setup blocks have been placed and the flow of data established all that is left to do is to change the properties of each block as desired The properties window of a block can be brought up by clicking the block and then clicking Edit Properties Doing this for the RMYoung sensor block brings up the following window Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com I RM Young Sensor Direction Analog IYO Module p 7 Input Channel p 7 Excitation Channel e E Speed Units MPH 7 Lo Cee Detailed information on the different fields in this block can be found in Appendix A Setup Blocks For now just change the units to from mph to Knots and click OK Processing Block Example Now click the top measure sensor block and select Edit Properties a ze F Add Exit Time foo 05 00 L Interval g 20 00 l This is where we enter the start time offset and the sampling interval The measure block is used when samples are desired at a fixed regular interval We set up this block to measure wind speed every twenty minutes with a five minute offset from the top of the hour i e at 05 00 25 00 45 00 every hour Log Block Example Finally click the top the log block to view its properties Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corpora
174. ere s an example of a header that includes the station name as well as field and units headers Station Name Xpert Date Time RecID AT RH Heat Flux Esen Dielectric Moisture NetRad SoilTemp mm dd yyyy HH MM SS C W m2 uV W m2 W m2 C 01 27 2012 16 39 00 Default 155 47 100 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 01 27 2012 16 39 30 Default 154 82 100 00 1829 85 42 69 380 42 229 92 27847 42 24 36 Satlink The Satlink branch is used when you have a Sutron Satlink transmitter connected to the Xpert This branch is used to manage the details of the setup for both self timed and random transmissions Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status 1 0 Modules a Log files Satlink Self Timed Random Self Timed Test Random Test Self test H Setup File pert ssf y Edit Satlink Dialog Selecting Satlink and pressing Edit brings up the main Satlink dialog Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Satlink Properties Satellite ID oo000000 k Comm Port comz 7 Local Time Offset min b fs Initialize Satlink V OK Cancel Satellite ID This property is the Satellite ID for both self timed and random transmissions The Satellite ID is a hexadecimal number 8 digits long assigned by NESDIS EUMETSAT or some other authorizing agency Comm Port The Com
175. ernal flash disk folder Whenever specifying the location to place files press the UP button see below to see a root directory structure The storage card will be shown as USB Card and SD Card folders Double click the folder to select it Name funtitled log ea Expand Log File Capabilites A storage card can be used to increase the amount of log file flash disk space from the built in 32MB shared to the size of the storage card To do this follow these steps First place the card into the appropriate slot Then go to the Setup tab Click LOG then EDIT Click the NEW button Click the button next to filename Click the UP button and then double click into the storage card s folder Enter a file name for your log Click the OK button back to the LOG FILE PROPERTIES box Don t forget to increase the size of your log file 10 Now click OK and the log file will be created on the storage card CHNAKARWNS To use the log on the storage card select the log file on the storage card folder from the LOG block properties Note the minimum log size is 2048 bytes The maximum log size is the lesser of 1 2 billion bytes or 2 the free space available on the storage medium minus a small safety buffer 32k for storage cards 192k for Flash Disk Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Upload Download Setups S
176. ernel 6 Use the menus that follow to specify either a transfer via ymodem or ethernet and follow the instructions to send the file Xpert2 ker downloaded in step 1 7 After the upgrade is complete reboot the Xpert 257 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Upgrade the Application The Xpert application Xpert exe and associated dlls and slls as well as remote exe can be upgraded using the steps outlined in this section Use great caution here as mixing different versions of slls and dlls can cause very strange hard to diagnose behavior 1 Download either the serial or storage card upgrade from the Sutron website at the following address www sutron com downloads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 vX X X X zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC The Xpert application consists of Xpert exe all dll files dll and all standard sll files those files with sll extension that do not appear in the extra sll directory Of course you may also use one or more sll files in the extra sll directory 2 Start hyperterm or other terminal program on a PC Set the baud rate to 115 200 Connect the COM1 serial port to the Xpert If you intend to transfer files via ethernet connect the Xpert to a network that supports DHCP using an ethernet cable 3 P
177. es in the X column Any XY pair can be edited or deleted by clicking on that pair and clicking Edit Pair or Remove Pair To erase all the entries in the table click Clear All To save the file or load a previously saved file click Load or Save For an interpolation table larger than a dozen entries or so it might be faster to generate it on a PC with Notepad for example and then upload it to the Xpert Files should be created in comma separate format such as the below example 207 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 10 22 11 55 12 481 20 999 15 0 40 01 The extension of the file should be changed to tbl before uploading 208 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Georgia Pacific Sampler GPSmpl Inputs DigIn Outputs DigOut Description This block samples the input digital at a user set interval When the input transitions from low 0 to high 1 increment sampler count and save the time of the event Then delay for n seconds user set and then force measurements of PH1 T1 PH2 and T2 PH1 PH2 T1 and T2 will be set up using standard blocks by tying a COMS TAG to the blocks that make the measurement and convert the value to the desired units When the measurements are complete append the following record to storage card filename csv
178. et Allows XTerm to communicate with a networked Xpert2 running V3 2 or later of Remote If the Xpert2 is connected to a firewall and telnet access is desired than the firewall must be configured such that connections on TCP port 23 will be allowed to the Xpert2 In general the TCP IP option is quicker because it has less overhead but since command line access occurs over telnet port 23 Xterm and command line can share the telnet port if desired limiting the number of ports that must be opened in the firewall e Redirector Allows XTerm to communicate to a station hosted by the Sutron Redirector service Pressing the Redirector button will allow to specify the user name and password assigned to you by Sutron for this purpose You select the station you wish to connect to by entering its name in the URL box or you may select it from the list of stations you own by pressing the Detect button XTerm for the PocketPC does not show the 640x480 big screen option since its screen is too small The sample command line text area is also missing since the PocketPC does not have a command line 101 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To configure XTerm to remember selections when run from a desktop PC press the Create Desktop Shortcut button If you have entered passwords you will be prompted if you wish to store them in the shortcut A shortcut tha
179. ete When creating or editing a sensor the following dialog is shown Sensor Configuration Name mand A Sensor apc 7 Mog C Avg V psP Use these arrows SAT st O RND OFr to move quickly between all com Tac OM Rt Digits e sensors assigned value jneno 7 Module F z to the current measurement Slope f Jove BB Channel 5 7 offset 0 f NAME The name used when logging except when Log ID is active and when displaying the sensor value in the EzSetup menu and the Sensors Tab SENSOR Defines the sensor type to measure Click the box to see the list of all possible sensor types Note that each of these sensor types correspond to a sensor block that can also be used in the graphical setup This means that all the descriptions for sensor blocks in Appendix A apply to the sensor type you select here Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MORE This button brings up the configuration dialog for the selected sensor See Appendix A for details on how to change the configuration Note Most sensors have many more important settings than can be shown on the EzSetup Sensor Configuration dialog The additional settings are accessed by pressing More LOG When checked the system logs the output to ssp log Logging to ssp log as opposed to a log specified by the user ensures the data
180. etup files can be stored on storage cards just as they are stored on the local flash disk To do this follow these steps To save a setup Using Xterm or the touchscreen Place the card into the storage card slot Go into the SETUP tab Select the FILE drop down menu to do a SAVE From the file selection menu press the UP button Then double click into the storage card folder USB Card SD Card Give the setup a name or leave it at the default then click ok DOP Oye To open a setup using XTERM or the touchscreen Place the card into the storage card slot Go into the SETUP tab Select the FILE drop down menu to do a OPEN or APPEND From the file selection menu press the UP button Then double click into the storage card folder USB Card SD Card Click on the setup name to open and then click ok DO Pe Download log files Log files can be retrieved from a unit onto a storage card To do this follow these steps To retrieve the log using Xterm or the touchscreen Place the card into the storage card slot Go into the LOG tab Click export choose a data format then click OK Click the UP button Then double click into the storage card folder USB Card SD Card Give the file a name or use the default Select the download format then click OK SAWP YS Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 4 Graphical Setup Diagrams
181. fies a logfile SSP LOG is used by default hh mm ss e S specifies a start date and time for retrieval If a start date is not specified then it will default to where the last GET left off e E specifies an end date and time for retrieval If an end date is not specified the end of the log is assumed e CSV will use a comma separated format CSV will also show more decimal places by default only 3 places are shown to help keep columns aligned e YMODEM will cause the report to be transferred as lt sitename gt _Y YY YMMDD TXT where lt sitename gt is the name of the station and YY YYMMDD is the date of the first entry in the log If the data is from a log other then SSP log then the format of the file created will be as follows lt sitename gt _ lt logfile gt _YYYYMMDD TXT e ZIP will cause the output to be compressed in to a ZIP archive file with a ZIP extension e If there are more than 24 lines of output the display will 283 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com pause with a More prompt until space is pressed to continue or ESC to abort e C will cause the output to be continuous without pause until the end is reached or ESC is pressed e REVERSE will cause the output to be generated in reverse time order newest to oldest e BAD will cause only bad data and system errors to be displayed e
182. file 66 R radio modem See modems LOS Radio modem RADIOx 281 Random Group block 236 Random Parameter block 238 Random Properties 51 Random Test 53 Rate 50 51 recording status XPert 20 Refresh button 54 69 remote exe 280 281 Reset button 42 55 Reset FS button 55 resistance measurements 136 137 140 RM Young Wind Sensor block 180 RndGroup block 236 ROC Alarm 197 RS232 modules specifications 272 RS 485 5 15 24 25 34 122 S sample duration 199 206 interval 199 206 satellite ID 48 Satlink description 273 installation 118 20 121 23 properties 47 random properties 51 random test 53 self timed properties 48 self timed test 52 Status 54 schedule interval 199 206 304 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com time 199 206 SDI AquaTrak block 183 SDI 12 See Also Digital I O Modules commands 61 SDI 12 block 182 SDIAqua block 183 SDK 276 278 SE8500 block 184 Self Timed Parameter block 239 Self Timed properties 48 Self Timed Test 52 SendTag block 246 sensor blocks See Also blocks Air Temperature 133 Air Temperature Relative Humidity 135 Analog 135 40 Barometric Pressure 142 BEI Absolute Encoder 143 Binary Input 144 Binary Input All Channels 146 Bridge Resistance 148 CapRain 149 Constant 151 Counter 153 CS107 Temperature Sensor 155 Frequency 157 204
183. from the left side of the screen to the right Block Inputs and Outputs Setup blocks are hooked together via their inputs and outputs A block with an input can accept data from another block and a block with an output can send data to another block To see this more clearly we ll zoom in on our example using the Zoom button on the top of the screen Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com E Zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit We can now clearly see the inputs and outputs each block has available along with which are being used and which aren t It is now evident for example that only the pressure from the BP block is being sampled not the temperature and that only the maximum value of this pressure is being logged Block Connectability The graphical setup allows any two blocks to be connected together as long as the first has an output and the second an input However this does not necessarily mean that any constructed setup will work For example even though the system will allow a sensor block to be hooked directly to a log block no data will necessarily be logged unless there is an active block to control when processing takes place active blocks are those with darkened borders see the example in the next section Active Blocks and Push Pull Active blocks are blocks that make the other blocks connected to t
184. g The Random Dialog allows the setting of the Random transmission properties Random transmissions are those that are made at random intervals The properties correspond to settings that will be sent to Satlink to configure it as well as settings that will be used by software to make the transmission A typical dialog is shown below followed by a brief explanation of each property Random Properties Enable Random Append Lat Lon Append Quality 7 Norm Rt 12 00 00 es Channel fisi Alarm Rt 01 00 00 B Type 100 bp x Burst Rt 00 01 00 al Burst P Format Bin Int values B f OK Cancel Enable Random This box must be checked for the system to make random transmissions This field is sent to the Satlink to configure the transmitter and uses the field to control its own scheduling Append Lat Lon Satlink transmitters have a GPS Global Positioning System receiver which is cable of determining its latitude and longitude This check box instructs Satlink to add the Latitude and Longitude to the end of each transmission Append Quality This check box configures Satlink to append quality data to the end of the transmission Note as of version 4 11 of Satlink Satlink has not yet implemented this function Norm Rt The Normal Rate property defines how often random transmissions will be made when the unit is not in alarm The rate is specified in HH MM SS Alarm Rt The Alarm Rate p
185. g file The Xpert can support logging to many different log files at one time A log file can be viewed even if it is open and being logged to The Log tab is meant mainly to allow viewing of small sections of the log in order to validate sampling or to view recent values To view large sections of the log or to perform data analysis the log file should be retrieved from the unit This is done using the Export button XTerm COM6 115200 xj 4 Scroll right to see the Press here to Upgrade display the list of _Status_ available log IV Web Server files V Auto Update Log Flash Disk ssp log Press here to enter a note into the currently selected log Column Labels Time This is the timestamp for the data in the log This time is normally the time when the data was measured In the case of an average the time will be the time of the last measurement In other cases the time will be the time the computation was completed Sensor This is the name of the sensor signal that the logged value came from These names are user entered in the properties window of each log block in the Setup tab These should have unique names so that a charting or analysis programs can treat the values differently Data This is the value of the data point The value is shown with a user defined number of digits to the right of the decimal point The user can set this precision in the properties window of each log blo
186. gher channel Connect the sensor ground white to GND Connect the sensor power red to SW D 12V Description This block supports Sutron s 5600 0089 soil moisture temperature sensor The type box supports the following Moisture measure moisture only Moisture temperature measure moisture and temperature on a separate channel Moisture temp muxed measure moisture wait 5 seconds then measure temperature on the same channel The use digital check box allows you to specify a digital channel to enable individual sensors see page 8 of the sensor manual for more details The cable correct check box directs the software to apply the cable offset correction as explained on page 12 13 of the sensor manual Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Soil Moisture Properties Type moisture v i OK i Analog Mod fi Analog Chan 1 e Use Digital Digital Mod F x Digital Chan F x Cable Correct V Length fai Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Soil Temperature SoilTemp Inputs lt none gt Outputs Soil Temperature Wiring The sensor is measured single ended Hence connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH10 and signal ground to AGND Connect power as desired De
187. hannel select the channel to which the sensor s V signal is connected Cal Method al and a0 Select the method to use for calibrating the sensor measurement to the actual soil type The possible selections are Mineral Organic and User Cal Mineral and Organic are generalized calibrations for those two classes of soils where predefined values of a0 and al are used to calculate moisture content User Cal allows you to enter your own values for a0 and al that you determine through a soil specific calibration procedure See the ML2x manual for more information on how perform this procedure Units enter the string that should be used when displaying Moisture units 168 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MRL MRL 700 Radar Sensor MRL700 Inputs lt none gt Outputs dist level sigstr Wiring and Configuration NOTE To use this block with the Xpert requires a unit with additional com ports configured as RS 485 Set the jumper for 12 volts to use power from this board Connect the sensor RS485 A to the RS485A pin 3 and the sensor B to the RS485B pin 2 NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COMS SSP CL set to none as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it The sensor must be configured to output in the following format distance signal strength with 9600 baud 7bit even pari
188. he Xpert is being used to solve The following questions can help guide that thinking What data needs to be collected What sensors will give this data What is the raw output of these sensors DC voltage AC voltage frequency Serial etc Can the built in I O handle all of these sensors or are additional modules needed How often should this data be collected What processing is needed to convert this raw data into a meaningful value Is there already a block defined to do this processing or is a generic input needed e Where does the data need to go once it is processed to a Satlink a modem a LOS radio a serial device PC display printer or just to a log Chapter 5 describes several example setups that can help get you started in configuring the Xpert If you need more help don t hesitate to call our Customer Service department They ve worked with many data collection and reporting scenarios and can help you set up your system just as you need Choosing the Right Block As Chapters 3 4 and 5 will reveal the Xpert setup is based on blocks that perform a specific function on data collected from a sensor or from another block The Xpert s Graphical Setup provides an interface to connect and configure these blocks The Xpert s EzSetup interface also uses blocks though they are hidden from the user s view Here s a simple map of sensor types to block types Sensor Type Sensor Block DC voltage output VoltMe
189. he Xpert to a network that supports DHCP using an ethernet cable 3 Power up the Xpert Press ESC in response to the message Press ESC now to Upgrade System 4 Press L to indicate you want to transfer the boot loader 5 Press U to indicate you want to upgrade the boot loader 6 Use the menus that follow to specify either a transfer via ymodem or ethernet and follow the instructions to send the file Xpert2 lod downloaded in step 1 7 After the upgrade is complete reboot the Xpert Upgrade the Kernel The Xpert boot menu provides the ability to upgrade the Xpert kernel either by serial or ethernet transfer 1 Download either the serial or storage card upgrade from the Sutron website at the following address www sutron com downloads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 v3 0 zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC The kernel is stored in the file Xpert2 ker 2 Start hyperterm or other terminal program on a PC Set the baud rate to 115 200 Connect the COM serial port to the Xpert If you intend to transfer the kernel file via ethernet connect the Xpert to a network that supports DHCP using an ethernet cable 3 Power up the Xpert Press ESC in response to the message Press ESC now to Upgrade System 4 Press K to indicate you want to transfer the kernel 5 Press U to indicate you want to upgrade the k
190. he about dialog press the About button The About dialog displays version and copyright information for the Xpert executable and libraries This dialog also displays the serial number of the unit Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com XK xpert ver 2 2 0 6 Sutron Corp Copyright C 2004 S N 9901677 Yersions of files in use File version Kernel 3 1 20040407 Loader 2 6 20031211 Remote 2 1 4 4 Xpert exe 2 2 0 6 WVindows Engine dll 2 2 0 6 Lindewwell annnr cil 99746 The Exit App button is used to stop the Xpert program Normally this is only done when you want to update the program itself When the Xpert program is stopped no data collection or recording will take place The software warns with the message Warning this will terminate the Xpert program All data and setup not in flash will be lost Are you sure Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com USING STORAGE CARDS Each Xpert can support USB and SD storage cards These storage cards can be used to either expand flash disk space for data logs to upload download setups or to download log files Custom applications may add other functionality NOTE Storage Cards must be formatted FAT16 or FAT32 not NTFS Working with a storage card is similar to working with the int
191. he change in input value is computed in one of two ways depending on the state of Fixed Interval If Fixed Interval is checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value If Fixed Interval is not checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value that caused a ROC Alarm to occur Since no alarm has occurred on the start of recording the first reading taken after the press of START recording Or power up is used as the basis to determine ROC alarm once the unit goes into alarm the alarm value becomes the basis for the next alarm 197 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Accumulator Accum Inputs Data the data to accumulate Enable enable disable the accumulation when input is disconnected or input value is non zero accumulation is enabled Outputs TAccum Trigger accumulation Output when the running accumulation surpasses the threshold value Accum Accumulation since last scheduled reset Trigger Trigger Output set to 1 when the running accumulation surpasses the threshold value PTotal Previous total which is value of accumulation at scheduled reset Description The Accum block is used to accumulate input data and to set outputs based on the c
192. he different Sutron sensors Sutron Sensor Thermistor 5600 0010 Linear 5600 0011 44032 5600 0020 Linear 5600 0025 44036 5600 0030 44036 When this air temp block is used with linear sensors a double voltage measurement is made If desired a linear sensor can also be measured by the voltage block and appropriate values for slope and offset The 5600 0011 5600 0025 and 5600 0030 thermistor assemblies come with a sense resistor to connect from the assembly to Vref This sense resistor is not utilized when connecting the thermistor assembly to an 8080 0003 AIO module Air Temp Thermistor Properties Analog 1 0 Module fa a Channel ji x Cancel Thermistor ID ysi 44036 x Units F Oc Configuration diagram for linear sensor using Xpert Slope and offset are preset based on Thermistor ID Air Temp Thermistor Properties Analog 1 0 Module Channel Cancel Excitation Channel Thermistor ID 5600 0010 x Completion Resist 10000 fed Units F Oc did 134 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Air Temperature Relative Humidity AT RH Inputs lt none gt Outputs TempOut HumidOut Wiring Wire each output to a separate analog channel Power the sensor off of the Battery of SW12 as selected in the setup Description T
193. he system goes into alarm if the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband 4 The change in input value is computed in one of two ways depending on the state of Fixed Interval If Fixed Interval is checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value If Fixed Interval is not checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value that caused a ROC Alarm to occur 237 Bring ing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Random Parameter Random Inputs Input Outputs Output pass through Description This block allows you to include the data from the input in a random satellite transmission It is most commonly linked to the output of a log block but can also be linked to the output of a measure or average The Random Properties dialog is used to enable random transmissions and define the normal and alarm rate for the transmissions This block lets you assign the sensor to one of the 8 different random groups groups 2 9 Each group must have a separate trigger sensor defined by the Random Group block When the trigger sensor goes into alarm as defined by the Random Group block above the Xpert will m
194. he units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors page For the calibration the user will enter the current value sensor The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained SDI Properties Address 4 X Command fe Ld Ld Ll Cancel Slope Offset Units mT Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SDI AquaTrak SDIAqua Inputs lt none gt Outputs Average Std Outliers Cals Quality Wiring SDI 12 port Description The SDI Aquatrak block is designed to operate with the Aquatrak 4100 series controller and sensor heads for measuring water level The Aquatrak sensor must be configured separately to specify the measurement modes and desired averaging algorithm and number of samples to take The typical configuration uses the NOS DQAP algorithm measuring 181 samples Once configured the Xpert will make measurements using the standard SDI M command or C command if Concurrent is selected Testing has shown that the Aquatrak controller tends to ignore the retries that come very quickly as part of the normal SDI 12 retry process Hence this block performs an additional retry after the user specified Retry Delay This delay should be set to 2000 minimally when Concurrent is selected and set to 3000 minimally
195. hem execute or perform their function This results in data being pushed and pulled from and into the other blocks Active blocks always have a darker thicker border so they are easier to recognize Active blocks typically ignore the call to execute and push pulls from other active blocks This helps to ensure the system is as determinant as it can be i e this helps to ensure you can figure out who s going to execute and when In the example below the first Measure block signals the Const block to execute and then pushes the result into the second Measure block and the lower Log block L2 The data is logged to L2 but since Measure blocks are active and thus ignore pushes and pulls the data is not logged to L3 When the second Measure block executes it signals the first Measure block to execute and then pushes the result to L3 When the Measure block is signaled he simply returns the last known value for Const instead of measuring anew again since active blocks ignore push pull requests Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com XTerm COM1 115200 BEE Const Measurg Measure LS IV Web Server IV Auto Update Block Placement Some setup blocks require specific placements to work properly Here are some examples e ComsTag block in order for a ComsTag block to be able to retrieve a new live value from an input sen
196. hes the version of Xpert firmware 276 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com OVERVIEW Xpert speech files are binary data files containing audio data in Rockwell 4 bit ADPCM 7200hz mono format These files are headerless meaning they have no information describing the content of the file just sample data Users can create these files using one of several aftermarket programs for the PC One such program is Vox Studio by Xentec This program allows the user to record speech using a microphone connected to the PC and save it in the appropriate format Rockwell 4 bit ADPCM 7200hz mono The file can then be loaded into the Xpert using Xterm into the corresponding language subdirectory under flash disk speech e g English Spanish etc and used by selecting it in a ComsTag dialog just as you would any other speech file Note You will need to save the file with a unique name and with the extension vox so that the Xpert will display the file for selection The program Vox Studio by Xentec is available for download at http www xentec be download download htm Note the unregistered version of this program limits the length of files to 5 seconds As of this writing a fee of 399 is required to register which removes the limitation When using Vox Studio or any other editing program Sutron recommends trimming off the leading and tr
197. his block supports the Sutron air temperature relative humidity sensors 5600 0311 12 13 14 the Rotronic HygroClip S3 and the Vaisala HMP45 HMP155G active model supporting 40 60 and HMP155J active model supporting 80 60 Select the proper Analog I O module temperature channel humidity channel and temperature units If the sensor is hooked up to a constant power source that is either to the battery directly or the Batt terminal of the module select Batt for power If the sensor is hooked to the SwBatt terminal of the module so as to not draw current unless the sensor is begin sampled select SW Batt for power Specify the number of seconds the sensor should be powered prior to measurement in Warmup s To keep the block from ever outputting greater than 100 for humidity corresponding to 100 relative humidity check the box next to Limit Humidity AT RH 5600 Properties AIO Module fi Power Batt 7 Temp Chan 1 ol Type 5600 0311 x Hum Chan 2 Warmup 5 i Limit RH Temp Units to 100 M Celsius Fahrenheit j Cancel 135 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Analog ADC Inputs lt none gt Outputs AIOData Wiring This section discusses the many different ways to use the ADC block from a wiring perspective Excitation Many sensors are resistive or ratiometric in natu
198. hown in device time which knows nothing about local time All times displayed on the left side bottom on the Pocket PC are shown in PC time which reflects a correction for the PC s local time zone This can lead to some confusing behavior when the PC s local time zone is set to something other than Greenwich Mean Time GMT as certainly many are For example if you transfer a file from the Xpert to the PC the file timestamp shown on the PC will be different than what is shown on the Xpert The key to working through this confusion is to remember the times shown in both cases are each relative to the device on which the file sits the Xpert or PC Process List Folder The virtual files under the Process List virtual directory give important details on what programs are running in the Xpert The files are virtual in that they do not exist physically as files on the Xpert The information is organized in this fashion to make it easier to view and transfer for analysis A sample Process list is shown below Note that it can take 10 seconds or more for the system to produce the Process List 107 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PC Files c WINNT Profiles don Desktop El Pert Files Process List lt DIR gt lt DIR gt device exe 17 CO7CCBAA 67200 43 578s filesys exe 1 207CDC26 432 1 252s gwes exe 9 007438F 2
199. i Gain x128 Gain 5600 0600 Typ 40 mV 3000 W m x y y 5600 0601 30 mV 2000 W m x y y 5600 0602 Typ 25 mV 2800 W m x y y 5600 0603 Typ 30 mV 10 000 umol s m x y y 5600 0604 Typ 200 mV 2000 W m y y X 5600 0605 70mV 2000 W m x y y Acceptable only when measured using 8080 0003 Analog I O module 190 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Submersible Pressure Transducer SubPres Inputs lt none gt Outputs PressEng Wiring Wire to SDI 12 port Description This block supports the Sutron 56 109 Submersible Pressure Transducer This SDI 12 sensor is used to measure water level or pressure in well or surface water applications The averaging time can be used to increase the measurement accuracy by lengthening the sampling time and or for situations where there are waves on the water surface Unit options are ft PSI kPa m cm or mm Submersible Pressure Properties SDI Address fo Averaging time fio d a Offset fo M Units water ft 7 191 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Tipping Bucket Sensor Precip Inputs lt none gt Outputs Precip Wiring Connect one side of the tipping bucket switch to the selected digital channel Connect the other wire to GND
200. ically com1 would not be checked as it is used for Xterm communications to setup the station You would check it if you wanted to connect a communications device to com and see alarm data go out that port The Master ID which is the name of the PC Base Station in an SSP system is specified here too Other SSP parameters can be specified in the Setup menu and pressing the Test button will test communications SSP Settings Pressing the Setup button displays this SSP setup menu This menu will allow additional settings for SSP communications over a variety of devices All entries except retries are in units of seconds SSP Settings Carrier Delay fi A J Reply Delay Bo bl Cancel Ack Delay fio sail Retries Bo ie Retry Delay bo lac Carrier Delay When the com port is set for RADIO communications this is how long to key the transmitter assert DTR to warm up the radio before sending data With Sutron radios Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com typically 1 second or less is needed but this may need to be increased if hardware repeaters are used in the network as each hard repeater in the network needs time to warm up Ack Delay When the Xpert is acting as a master this is how long to wait for a response to a request aka an acknowledgement The default value is 10 seconds which is suitable for
201. ies 276 305 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Sutron Speech Voice modem See modems speech modem T telemetry blocks See Also blocks Coms Tag 235 Random Group 236 Random Parameter 238 Self Timed Parameter 239 SendTag 246 Telemetry modules 5 temperature sensor block See Air Temperature sensor block Air Temperature Relative Humidity sensor block CS107 Temperature sensor block Test check box 151 tests communication 28 I O Modules 9 random 53 self timed 52 touchscreen 9 thermistor 133 134 138 155 time 50 column log file 65 setting 19 108 Tipping Bucket Sensor block 192 touchscreen calibrating 128 troubleshooting 128 Type 50 52 U units column log file 66 unpacking 8 update application 258 extension 257 kernel 257 remote exe 281 Upgrade 109 users 18 55 56 57 Vv VectAvg block 219 Vector Average block 219 View Data tab 62 View Log tab 21 59 voice modem See modems speech modem VOICEx 281 Volt Meter block 194 195 voltage measurement 136 139 VoltMeter block 194 195 W Web Server 109 window transmission time 50 Wire button 86 87 wiring 85 wrap 45 XPert installation 118 models 5 picture 4 product description 4 XTerm See Also remote exe auto update 109 connect 109 file transfer 106 installation 100 introduction 100 oper
202. ies When an SSP request is made that requires a reply the system will wait for the Ack Delay for the reply If a reply is not received then one or more retries is performed Retries is the total number of attempts to make The default value is 3 Combined with the default Ack Delay of 3 seconds this means SSP will send the same message as many as 3 times with a 3 second delay between each attempt before it will timeout and report a tx error All retry messages have the same FLAG SEQUENCE number as the original message This is used to prevent the same message from being processed twice due to a long network delay The preset buttons set the SSP timing according to 4 common scenarios The 115 2k puts the values back to their defaults Smart Modem selects a very long 1 minute ack delay and reply delay since it s expected the smart modem will perform retries and will normally never fail but may take a while to send data when line conditions are poor The Slow amp Smart settings are similar to the Smart Modem settings but include other enhancements to help Xterm perform over a high latency but reliable connection such as a TCP IP based cell phone modem Eliminating retries which would only conflict with the previous message still being sent is one such improvement Slow amp Smart may also be selected from the command line with the SLOW option 1200 baud selects settings designed to work with lower baud rates and dumb radio system
203. ime Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Send Current Time SendTime Inputs lt none gt Outputs lt none gt Description This block is used to synchronize the system time of connected units that speak SSP i e other 9210s Xperts 8210s etc This block sends an SSP set time message containing the current system time to the destination unit s specified by the Path property The message is sent periodically according to the scheduling parameters Time and Interval To broadcast the set time message to all listeners set the Path property to Otherwise enter a specific station name or station path e g patha pathb stationx Set the Port property to the communications port to which the other device s is are connected This com port must already be defined in the Setup tab under COMS SSP CL SendTime Properties Time 00 00 00 OK Interval 05 00 00 cancel Port Ssp3 7 Path E Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Soil Moisture SoilM Inputs lt none gt Outputs Dielectric Moisture Temp Wiring Connect the sensor output green to the selected channel on the analog module If the Type is moisture temperature connect the temperature output blue to the next hi
204. imeout below must be set to ensure the PB200 is powered on for subsequent measurement intervals Inactivity s This property defines how many seconds of inactivity no measurements may occur after a measurement before the sensor is powered down Since the PB200 200WX sensor takes several seconds following power on to produce valid data it often makes sense to not turn off power to the sensor during times of frequent measurements e g when averaging for only a portion of a measurement interval To ensure the sensor is not powered off before the next sample set Interval to a value greater than the measurement interval If instead you wish the sensor to power off after each sample and therefore force the sensor to wait the Warmup time on every measurement then set Interval to some small value e g 0 Sync to GPS Time This property determines whether the PB200 block should set the Xpert system time to the UTC time obtained from the PB200 200WX sensor 176 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PT 3 Ra Platinum RTD PlatRTD Inputs lt none gt Outputs PlatRTD Wiring Connect the sensor to channels 1 2 3 4 etc as selected for a differential measurement Connect the sensor as shown below NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION EXCITATION CHANNEL ODD CHANNEL EVEN CHANNEL AGND 4 wire mode
205. ing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com fa 0 1 i ee te ee COM 1 4 a a H o 6 I o o Jumper ms 5 re Locations o l bi Haase SLs a g FAS N o C fa O i E e eo vol oO oO Ma THE Q N 5 x j Sn COM1 J800 COM2 J900 Ea COM3 J901 COM4 J1000 oa 5V_ 12V noi RL SWD SWD 5V_ 12V Tr T2 112 1 f2 4 2 112 3 4 3 l4 alala 3 la i tl 5 5 5 6 5 6 Ge 7 8 7 8 7 8 Z 8 Z8 O e em em ojoo Optional Com 6 9 Tamner 6r co Oo a O S N gt hia COM6 IS 4 Maximum Current Draw from Com Port Pin 9 Xpert Com 1 4 Each of the pin 9 power outputs is individually fused and each can provide up to 300mA across the rated temperature range The fuse is a self resetting type that will automatically pass power through when the overload short circuit has been removed 124 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sut
206. inging the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Windows Ezsetup sll Windows Logger dl1 Windows LogMgr d11 Windows LZO d11 Windows Satlink sl1 Windows SDI d11 Windows Utils dll Windows Xpert exe aaaaaaaa Ne Send over the standard application files Basic sll COMS eS LILT Deflib s1l1 Engine dll EzSetup sll Logger d1ll LogMgr d1l1 LZO d q Remote exe Satlink sll SDI d11 Utils d1ll Xpert exe AnNNDNNNDNDNHNANHNNNNN s Ne Send over any extra slls desired By default these files are not sent Since they aren t used often S the user manual for descriptions To send an extra sll remove the semi colon that precedes the command p sll extra s GPRS232 s11 s NOS s11 P Ne Send over default speech files Flash Disk Speech Flash Disk Speech English Speech English QO vox Flash Disk Speech English 0 vox 1 vox Flash Disk Speech English 1 vox 10 vox Flash Disk Speech English 10 vox FY i FY i BGuunundosgs Ne Send the autoexec bat file over This file typically starts remote exe and Xpert exe after the system boots When starting remote it tells it which com ports it should cont
207. into the measurement interval and will typically be 00 00 00 as shown above Setting it to 00 05 00 would cause the measurments to occur at 5 minutes 20 minutes 35 minutes and 50 minutes past the hour In other words at 00 05 00 and every 15 minutes thereafter SAMPLING INTERVAL For sensors with averaging enabled the sampling interval specifies the timing between samples Note This should be at least as long as the time required to take the samples If not the Samples to Average takes on a new meaning described below SAMPLES TO AVERAGE Specifies how many samples to take in averaging a sensor Note The sampling interval along with the samples to average defines a sampling window over which the samples will be taken Sixty samples taken at a one second interval defines a sixty second sampling window In situations where the sampling interval is shorter than the time required to take the samples the unit will take consecutive samples for the duration defined by the sampling window In other words if an SDI 12 sensor that took 2 seconds was being measured by the above setup the averaging would be for 60 seconds 00 00 01 times 60 instead of 120 seconds Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com needed for 60 samples The unit must collect over half of the samples before the average will be marked with a G as good MEASUREMENTS PER LOG All
208. ion DEBUG Disables resetting of unit by the software watchdog so it doesn t interfere with debugging code NOCOMI1 Causes a session on COMI not to be started so COM1 may be used for some other purpose Example the following command runs remote exe to support a direct connection on COM1 and a Sutron voice modem on COM3 flash disk remote exe coml 115200 voice3 115200 It s usually not possible to place special command line options for Remote in the Autoexec bat file because whenever a com port setting is changed in the Xpert application the settings you make will be replaced For this purpose extra command line options may be placed in a file called Remote opt This is a simple ASCII text file that can be created with notepad and transferred to the Xpert and placed in the Flash Disk folder It can contain a single line of options that are concatenated to the parameters passed to Remote in the Autoexec bat So for instance if you wished to enable AUTOLOGON and disable H W handshake on port 2 you would place the following in the Remote opt file AUTOLOGON HS2 Bypassing Autoexec bat by pressing Ctrl C will also bypass any options in the Remote opt file as of version 3 2 Remote exe is designed to communicate with Sutron s XTerm program to provide a wide range of functions In addition you can use a terminal emulator with remote and issue one of the following commands Note if you have set up a
209. irst click the RMYoung icon click Select Output and then from the slide out menu click Dir for the direction output Zoom Dg wire Add gt Eyit Edit P Insert RM Young Clear sel Dir Delete Delete Right Rename Now click the Add button at the top of the screen click Processing to show the processing blocks select the Measure block and click OK Now we see another measure block has been placed under the first Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Measur Although it seems as though we would now hook this measure block up the to the log block already placed in the setup we actually now want to add another log block below the first This is because a setup blocks input cannot accept a signals from more than one block However this results in no loss of functionality as the new log block can be configured to log to the same log file as the previous one So to add this second log block click the Add button select Logging to bring up the logging blocks select the Log block and then click OK we didn t have to select the output from processing as it was already selected from above Now both of the signals from RMYoung will be sampled and logged F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit MeasureLog Changing Block Properties S
210. is available through legacy telemetry channels When ssp log does not exist the user is prompted to create it when leaving Setup AVG When checked the system averages the sensor according to the sampling schedule defined in the measurement schedule NOTE When using EzSetup to average both speed and direction of either the RMYoung and GillWind sensors the system computes a unit vector average of wind direction and a scalar average of wind speed However this is only the case when the sensors have been set up properly where the system considers speed and direction as coming from the same sensor 1 e the sensor outputs are linked You can verify proper setup by ensuring the speed and direction parameters are grouped together under the sensor entry The following shows a proper setup for RMYoung El EZSetup Measurements G01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 RM Young AI0 1 Ch 1 01 WD Dir 02 WS Speed See the section Multi Output Sensors for more information on how to ensure sensors with multiple outputs are set up properly DSP When checked the sensor will be included when displaying current values from the 9210 front panel Pressing the DSP button will bring up a dialog that allows you to change the name and precision of the value shown on the front panel SAT ST Checkbox enables Self Timed transmissions for this sensor Clicking the ST box will bring up additional properties see Self Timed Parameter block in Appendi
211. it is similar to disconnecting and reconnecting the modules This is only needed if a module that is connected does not show up in this list Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LAN Settings The LAN Settings branch of the Setup tab enables you to control power to the LAN Ethernet To display the LAN Settings dialog select the LAN Settings entry and press the Edit button The following dialog displays Current State On en Auto can save some power over On when LAN cable is normally unplugged Lan Configuration LAN is in use by ser Settings View Config The Lan Configuration buttons On Auto and Off determine the state of the LAN when the Xpert first boots On causes the LAN to be turned on at boot The LAN stays on until explicitly turned off Auto turns the LAN on only when something is connected to the ethernet jack Auto is typically only set when you plan to connect your PC or laptop directly to the Xpert which requires a special ethernet crossover cable see below When Auto is selected and a device is not connected to the ethernet port the system draws only about mA more power than if the state was set to Off The LAN is in use by area displays the list of elements that have requested the LAN to be on This area will show User when the LAN Configuration setting is On Modbus when a modbus
212. l 141 random transmissions 51 238 self timed transmissions 49 temperature 142 excitation channel 141 exit 70 exporting log files 65 67 EzSetup Measurements 35 302 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Add sensor 37 New Measurement 36 overview 3 Sensor Configuration 37 F Field Variable blocks 63 248 File Transfer 106 Find button 61 66 FM block 159 formats transmission 50 52 Freq block 157 204 Frequency block 157 Fuel Moisture sensor block 159 fuses 130 G GetTag block 160 Gill Wind block 161 good data quality 66 Graycode input mode 146 GUI operation 17 70 Hi Alarm 197 I I O Modules 3 9 See Analog I O Modules Digital I O Modules PC Modules specifications 272 Initialize Satlink 48 Insert a Block 88 installation autoexec bat 280 COM ports 121 23 remote exe 281 XPert 118 20 XTerm 100 Internal Battery block 166 167 Interpolate block 207 209 K kernel updating 257 Lat Lon 49 51 linear sensors 134 live measurements 60 log blocks 227 229 231 See Also blocks See Also blocks See Also blocks log files blocks See log blocks blocks See log blocks blocks See log blocks blocks clearing 66 creating 45 data column 65 date column 66 Day buttons 66 exporting 65 67 Find button 66 managing 44 navigating 66 properties 45 Q qua
213. l 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Add gt Exit Barom Measure E Each block in the Xpert setup represents something different In the above setup the solar radiation SR and barometric pressure BP blocks represent physical sensors the measure blocks represents processing operations where the data is being regularly sampled and the log blocks represent the files in which data is being stored Data can be thought of as flowing from the left side of the screen to the right Each setup block has a properties window that is used to view or change its properties These windows are brought up by clicking an icon and then selecting Edit Properties from the menu that pops up The properties window for the Measure blocks looks like this F zoom Add gt Exit Let s say we plan to change the sampling intervals for the SR and BP sensor fairly often and don t want to go into the setup each time we want to change them Or perhaps we want to give technicians that do not have access to the setup screen the ability to change these two intervals These are cases where it makes sense to use FieldVar blocks Using the Add button in the Setup screen described in the next chapter we have now attached a FieldVar block to each measure block Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com E zoom Da wire A
214. last sample all the block s outputs mean min max etc are computed and are output Note the timestamp assigned to all the 199 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com output data is the time of the last sample In the example above the timestamp for the averaging period started at 12 35 00 would be 12 35 58 Note To shift the timestamp so that it occurs at the end of the Sample Duration increase the Schedule Time by one Sample Interval In the example above this means set Time to 00 05 02 so that the timestamp occurs at the top of each minute e g 12 36 00 The output quality of the averaged result will be good as long as at least half of the anticipated samples can be taken successfully The initial average calculation after recording start may contain fewer samples than subsequent runs since the calculation begins on the first sample interval that comes along after recording is started 200 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Bool Boolean Inputs X Y Outputs Output Description The Boolean block is used to perform boolean operations on the two inputs X and Y and output the result in Output Non zero data values are considered true A true output is assigned the value of 1 Bool Properties Operation AND
215. led values The page is automatically refreshed every 5 seconds Note that just because a sensor has been physically attached to the system does not mean the system software is aware it is there Adding a new sensor or other input to the system is done through the Setup tab Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status IntBat IBat 13 522624 Q G ITemp 86 160644 Q G Meas Meas alll Cal Prop SDI Live Measurements To get a live reading from any of the sensors first select that sensor in the Sensors window and then press the Meas button To get a live reading from all the sensors press Meas All Regularly scheduled sampling always gets priority over live readings which might result in a live reading taking several seconds to be returned Note If recording is not on then attached I O modules have not necessarily been initialized As such measurements may not be accurate Calibration Sequences The Calibrate button runs a calibration sequence on the selected sensor if one had been previously setup The calibration procedure writes a message to the log to document any change that is made See SETUP BLOCKS sensor descriptions to determine if a calibration method exists Properties The Prop button brings up the properties page for the selected sensor This allows sensor values to be changed without having to go to Setup note however settings cannot be changed without turning recordi
216. light 7 RS 232 and 1 RS 485 serial port 8080 0001 1B Xpert without Display 8080 0001 2B Xpert without Display with 8 Serial ports In addition the following are available as add ons to the system Xpert Telemetry Modules 8080 0005 1 Speech modem SL2 G312 1 Satellite Transmitter Xpert I O Modules 8080 0002 1 Xpert Digital I O 8 Channels 8080 0002 4 Xpert Digital I O 8 Channels with Surge Protection and 24 Cable 8080 0003 1 Xpert Precision Analog I O 6 Channels 8080 0003 3 Xpert Precision Analog I O 6 Channels with Surge Protection and 24 Cable 8080 0007 1 Xpert 10 channel 16 bit Analog I O Termination Boards 6461 1239 1T RS232 Surge Protection 6461 1240 1T Phone Surge Protection 6461 1241 1T SDI Surge Protection 6461 1242 1T Power Protection 5 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 2 Getting Started UNPACKING Carefully unpack the Xpert and other components that came with the system Note that some items come standard with every Xpert while other items are optional Standard Items The following items come with every Xpert that is shipped e One Xpert e One stylus for use with the touch screen only with models that have a touch screen e One CDROM containing PC Utilities and manuals e One DB9 M F serial cable Common Optional Items The next items sold separately either because they can be
217. lity column 66 selecting 66 sensor column 65 time column 65 units column 66 viewing 65 login 18 logout 18 21 LOS Radio modem See modems LOS radio modem Low Alarm 197 M Main tab 19 21 maintenance 21 128 max 198 199 Measure block 210 measurements analog 135 40 262 live 60 min 198 199 Minimum Maximum block 211 miscellaneous blocks See Also blocks Display 247 Set Field Variables 248 models 5 modems 303 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com data modem 34 installation 118 20 121 23 LOS Radio modem 34 273 speech modem 5 272 MODEM 281 Moving Average block 212 multiplier 157 N NESDIS 50 NFDRS format 50 Norm Rate 51 NOS format 50 O operation 17 70 P passwords 18 59 period 157 Platinum RTD block 174 177 Polynomial block 213 powering up 9 Precip block 192 precision 84 prefix 235 processing blocks See Also blocks Alarm 196 Average 198 199 205 Boolean 201 Interpolate 207 209 Measure 210 Minimum Maximum 211 Moving Average 212 Point Control 214 Polynomial 213 Set Point Control 216 Solar Radiation Accumulation block 217 Vector Average 219 XY Function 221 226 Processing blocks Dew Point 202 PtCtrl 214 Q Quadrature Shaft Encoder block 179 quality appending to random transmission 51 appending to self timed transmission 49 column log
218. machine on the network via XTerm remote yourIPorURL Auto Update The auto update checkbox causes XTerm to continuously request screen updates When the checkbox is clear XTerm will conserve the Xpert s power and CPU by only requesting updates for a short time after a key press or a touch Station Operations Right clicking the mouse on the right hand pane where the Right click for more options is displayed will bring up the Station Operations menu The menu has options to perform a Startup Shutdown or Reboot A confirmation dialog will be displayed before any of these commands are sent to the station If the operation cannot be supported due to insufficient access rights or a lack of support in the RTU firmware a message will be displayed Startup The startup option may be used to start up the main application of the RTU ex Xpert exe This will also re configure the Autoexec bat file on the station if needed Shutdown The shutdown option may be used to initiate a shutdown of main application of the RTU ex Xpert exe One purpose for shutting down the main application would be if you wanted to transfer a new copy of an SLL to the unit without performing a full upgrade If you don t allow enough time for the application to fully shutdown you will receive an error when you try to transfer the file over 109 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http ww
219. manage setups On power up the setup file having the same base name as the station name is loaded or if such a file doesn t exist the file default ssf is loaded if it exists Users Used to define system users in terms of name password access level and inactivity timeout Coms SSP CL Coms SSP CL functions included in coms sll enhances the remote communications abilities by adding support for the Sutron Speech Voice modem alarm detection and transmission with Speech or via a Hayes compatible data modem a LOS Radio modem or a direct connection Note GPRS Iridium and Satlink communications are not managed in this entry See their respective entries on the Setup tab SSP CL com ports are configured for Remote in the autoexec bat file factory default is a direct connect on COM 1 with no alarms going out the port To add support for alarms and or speech to other COM ports simply define them in the Coms SSP CL entry in the Setup tab Tthe system will then reconfigure remote to start running the new configuration immediately and update the autoexec bat for the next power cycle The Coms Tag block in the graphical setup is used to name SSP cur data points in the system and to specify speech phrases for Voice Modem if defined The Alarm block in the graphical setup is used to define what levels are considered in alarm which may trigger alerts transmissions over SSP CL comms devices Alarm A condition when one o
220. manufactured by others Takes measurements from low cost sensors High speed data transfers data downloads to PC at 115k baud Time accuracy of ten seconds per month over full temperature range 2 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com HIGHLIGHTS EzSetup and Graphical Setup The Key to Flexibility A unique part of the design is the ability to use the EzSetup and or the graphical block oriented setup Many simple measurements are quickly setup using EzSetup for even more flexibility the graphical setup blocks of various types are connected together to graphically represent data flow from all sensors with data flowing from left to right An example EzSetup is shown below on the left and a graphical setup is shown below on the right Main setup Sensors Log Data Status Pai Zoom Bg wire Add gt Exit E EZSetup Measurements a Fl FF E 01 00 15 00 Next 14 30 00 O01 AT AIO 1 Ch 1 AirTemp MeasureLog 02 RH AT Humidity New Sensor New Measurement Graphical Setup I 00 Modules Log files iy Pass Edit Delete ire LE Freq VectAvgLog z EzSetup Measurements Graphical Setup I O Modules The Key to Expansion The Xpert epitomizes the concept of expandability By itself the Xpert functions as a highly capable SDI 12 v1 3 compliant logger To add a sensor with an analog or digital o
221. mat lt tag name gt The format tags currently supported are lt name gt lt val gt lt units gt and lt qual gt Whenever the name tag is encountered during formatting it is replaced with the name of the field Similarly the val tag is replaced with the field value and the qual tag is replaced with the data s quality flag For example given a field named Temp with value after right digit application 21 55 units of C and good quality Format string Result lt name gt lt val gt lt units gt lt qu Temp 21 55 C G al gt lt name gt lt val gt lt qual gt Temp 21 55 G lt name gt lt val gt Temp 21 55 lt val gt lt units gt 21 55 C lt val gt 21 55 230 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LogRec Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The LogRec block works in tandem with the LogField block to enable you to build a record of data from several fields to add to a log The LogRec block defines the characteristics of the record In addition to disk based logging the LogRec block also supports FTP and Socket logging FTP logging appends the data to a text file on a FTP Server while Socket logging creates a TCP IP server that will log the data to any client that connects to it The following shows the Log Record
222. me gt _show TXT where lt sitename gt is the name of the station e If there are more than 24 lines of output the display will pause with a More prompt until enter is pressed to continue or ESC to abort The C option will cause the output to be continuous without pause until the end is reached or ESC is pressed e The alarm status of each tag is displayed More than one alarm condition may be displayed The following codes are common OK not in alarm A in alert transmitting 286 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com H high limit exceeded L low limit exceeded D rate of change exceeded SHUTDOWN Causes the Xpert program to exit so that Xpert exe DLLs and SLLs may be upgraded SMS cmd The SMS command allows commands normally issued via SMS text message to be issued at the command line If cmd is omitted the current state of the GPRS modem is displayed example Flash Disk gt SMS GPR2 Standby On next task SelfTimed at 17 30 05 NextST 17 30 05 LastAlarm 16 39 15 LastST 17 15 05 SMS2 Standby Otherwise cmd is processed as follows STAP url port Perform a shoulder tap by opening a GPRS connection to either the default command server or the specified url and port REDIR url port Open a GPRS connection to the default redirector server or the specified url and port
223. mented using a Polynomial block connected in line prior to the Self Timed parameter block Data Time and Interval Data Time and Data Interval are used to define which data values coming into the block should be stored for transmission For example a Data Time of 00 00 00 and a Data Interval of 00 15 00 will cause the SelfTimed Parameter block to store any data coming into the block whose timestamp matches those values i e any timestamp in the set 00 00 00 00 15 00 23 45 00 Similarly a Data Time of 00 02 59 and Data Interval of 00 06 00 will cause the block to store data whose timestamp falls in the set 00 02 59 00 08 59 00 56 59 Data Time and Data Interval are most useful for when the SelfTimed Parameter block is connected to an output that is providing data more frequently than it is being transmitted It also allows the formatter to identify data that is missing when it comes time to transmit it Num Values The SHEF SHEFFIX BIN NONINT and INSAT formats use Num Values to set the number of values of this sensor to include in the transmission NOTE Setting Num Values in the Setup tab first will provide the default value used when adding new SelfTimed blocks to the setup This can help reduce the number of edits you must make when creating a setup where the Num Values for each SelfTimed block is the same The BIN INT format only uses Num Values entered in the Setup tab The value in the SelfTimed block cannot be changed
224. nable should be wired to the SW BATT 12 output of the DIO module When DIO is selected the sensor enable should be wired to the DIO module and channel indicated in the Module and Channel properties Set Soil Type to the appropriate selection based on actual soil type The coefficients CO Cl and C2 change based on the soil type selected Select a soil type of User Defined to enter your own coefficients Block Placement The CS625WCR block should typically come BEFORE the measure or average or other active block that executes it This ensures the block operates on data from the same measurement frame and avoids odd side effects that come from active blocks operating on split paths 203 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Dew Point DewPt Inputs temper ature humidity Outputs dew point Description This block computes dew point from temperature and humidity The temperature input may have units of either Celsius or Fahrenheit the units field of the incoming data is used to determine which is in effect The humidity input is expected to be a percentage The dew point output is expressed in the same units as the incoming temperature The block has no user set properties Dew point is computed according to the WMO Guide to Meteorological Instruments and Methods Observation WMO No 8 seventh
225. nal and no built in current sensing resistors If using the 8080 0007 AIO instead of the 8080 0003 AIO then please refer to Example Configurations Using the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module section for the appropriate wiring connections 132 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SENSOR BLOCKS F Air Temperature Sensor AirTemp Inputs lt none gt Outputs AirTemp Wiring Connect the thermistor as shown below Set the excitation channel and the measurement channel the same NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION CHANNEL EXCITATION CHANNEL Thermistor AGND Wiring Diagram for a linear sensor connected to a 8080 0003 module excitation channel and measurement channel not the same EXCITATION CHANNEL CHANNEL ae v a o lt bk AGND LINEAR Description This block supports temperature sensors based on the YSI44006 YS1I44032 and YS144036 thermistors The AirTemp block makes a resistance measurement of the temperature and then converts the resistance to temperature Choose the Analog I O Module number the analog channel input the sensor is hooked to and the units this block should output the temperature in 133 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The following table shows the thermistor used by t
226. nally eight that can be used for communications devices and serial sensors with sensor specific setup blocks The units are configured from the factory to provide 5 volts out on COM3 pin 9 this allows a Sutron Xpert Voice modem to be connected with one serial cable to communicate and provide power without the need to open the unit Pin 9 of all ports are user configurable for Ring In RI 5 Vdc out 12 Vdc out switched 5Vdc out or switched 12 Vdc out 12Vdc is input power Switched options allow the unit to turn on power anytime the com port is opened and turn it off when the com port is closed COM is a modified DCE Female COM2 through COMx are a DTE Male Com 1 has pins 1 and 9 as inputs normal DCE would use these as outputs DCE ports are connected to a PC using a M F DB 9 straight thru cable The DTE ports can be wired to modems and Satlink using straight cables Pin out information COM 1 modified DCE Female DCE Signal Name Direction 1 CD IN modified 2 RD OUT 3 TX IN 4 DTR IN 5 GND 6 DSR OUT 7 RTS IN 8 CTS OUT 9 RI IN modified COM2 4 6 9 if installed DTE Male DTE Signal Name Direction 1 CD IN 2 RD IN 3 TX OUT 121 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 4 DTR OUT 5 GND 6 DSR IN 7 RTS OUT 8 CTS
227. ne Options ssseesseeeseseeeseseeessstsresrrstesrrserrtssestentestesteseertssertestertentesrertssenrrserteeesreeteserten et 113 CHAPTER 7 INSTALLATION scsscsscssssssescssssssssssscssssssnsssssnesscsnessessesssssssensssssnescesscssossossnesesssesssssessoseessoes 117 STEPS T INSTALLAN XPERT veeosa nr piedsbopseaah eu e e aei ase enp sive e aE Na ai yevetbeos sendy ai e chau eae TE ESES SERS n 118 USNG COM PORTS reer riaren iee paetae aoeeoe a r Eaa pe Sp EEEE ea e a SRE aen O aE ae ae ASR sd Neso SS 121 LO ATLETAS TA AA RER EIEE EO E AETA E E E EE ORA TE EE EEE TTE E E E E TE 121 Pmoutintormatio M se eee e e a e aa a inae iea n nia 121 URSE n olei RoT nn E SS T E EEEE EE EN EEE E EEE E EEEE EEE EE ETES 123 Maximum Current Draw from Com Port Pin 9 ooo ee eeecesseeceseceeneecesecesceecaccseneecsaeeesaeecsaeeeaeecaeeseneecsaeeeeaters 124 Xpert Com 14 a ea aerisit er r yaen ETIE EE EESE EEEE EE NEEE ESEN EERSTE ITE TETERE RERESET SEE ITERATE AE REAT Xpert com 5 9 Optional Quad Serial board Switched power setting see viceeccovers acc u ea E E I O EAEE tase E A AA E A O E A Otia et CHAPTER 8 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING essesessseseosoesessessescessesessossesoossesoesoesessossessossesoesoe 127 COMMON MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ss sseeseseeesestteeststteresteetesttttsserteeertestrstertestttrsestenresreeteseerte et 128 C libtat the Touchscreen en o E ea ER TRAE E E ETE E AAEE TEE Sat 128 Skip the AUtoeXee bater ane E re
228. new version of Remote downloaded to the Flash Disk folder When running Flash Disk Remote exe this command exits and downgrades to the original version in Windows In either case command line settings are retained UPGRADE YES P The UPGRADE command is used to upgrade system files using the Ymodem protocol This previous version of this command is now called OLDUPGRADE An upgrade can consist of a single new file to add to the system or complete set of application files contained in a ZIP file The upgrade command cannot upgrade the kernel or the loader only application files such as Xpert exe Remote exe DLLs SLLs BAS files etc are supported The UPG file used to perform upgrades with XTerm is not used The user is prompted Are you sure and must respond with a Y or y before the upgrade proceeds Following are the steps performed e The Xpert application is shutdown Any old application files on the Flash Disk are deleted This includes Xpert exe DLL and SLL The file transfer is performed The file or file s are then stored on the Flash Disk If the currently executing Remote exe needs to be replaced then Remote will shut itself down and restart the new version This will drop the current connection The Autoexec bat file will be verified and or modified to make sure that the correct version of Xpert exe is executing Flash Disk Xpert exe if it exists otherwise
229. ng I O Modules section If you do not see the in front of I O Modules the system was not able to detect any I O modules Check your cable to the I O modules Make sure you are connected to the IC port Refer to the troubleshooting section for help if you cannot get the system to find the I O modules The initial checkout of the Xpert is complete 9 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Optional SLL Library Sutron has written several custom sll s for various customers These sll s are provided in all upgrades for convenience While most of these sll s are specific to certain sensors special processing etc other customers may find a use for them Listed below are all the extra slls that are provided in the standard upgrade zip file along with a short description of their purpose If you find that one of these sll s may be of some use to your application and you want more information please contact Customer Service NOTE In some of these sll s a serial interface is needed In most cases the blocks that are created or setup tab entries that are made will need to have full control of the com port This is accomplished by leaving the com port set to NONE in the Coms SSP CL branch under the setup tab Refer to the specific documentation for the sll to see if the com port is to be defined in Coms SSP CL or not Aanderaa sll The purpose of
230. ng off Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Sending SDI 12 Commands The SDI button brings up a window that can be used to send commands and view responses from any SDI 12 sensor attached to the system as shown below Note that sampling from all sensors will be stopped while in this window SDI Interface The SDI 12 window has a box for selecting the address of the device to communicate with and also a Send button that allows you to create SDI 12 messages There is also a drop down menu with the last 5 commands to select and send one of the last commands that were issued The larger text box displays the history of the previous commands and replies from SDI 12 communication The SDI window has some shortcut buttons for sending the most common commands These commands are M measure DO data I information V verify and C A timer runs whenever a response is received on SDI 12 This timer is displayed and shows the number of seconds that have elapsed since the last response The user can use this timer to know when to issue D commands in the event that the SDI 12 device requires a long time to perform the measurement or function The user may also monitor the text box for the sensor s service request prompt This window also has a Find button Pressing it will cause the Xpert to cycle through all SDI addresses and displa
231. ng on the configuration of the system and the version of the system software Some standard entries are Graphical Setup I O Modules Log Files Self test and Setup File Examples of entries that might also appear include Coms SSP CL EZSetup Measurements and Satlink Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status H Basic a Coms SSP CL H EZSetup Measurements Graphical Setup 1 0 Modules LAN Settings Log files Satlink Self test iy Edit Tree overview Items in the setup tab are displayed with branches that can be expanded or compressed by clicking the or next to the branch This structure allows for displaying only as much information on the screen at one time as desired The following table gives a brief description of the purpose of each item The sections following the table give more detail on each item Tree Item Description Basic Used to compile and schedule basic programs See the Xpert Basic SLL User s Manual for more information Coms SSP CL Used to configure SSP and Command Line communications e g communications with Xconnect PCBase Xterm Hyperterminal etc This section is not used with most extra sll s that use com ports unless the documentation for that sll says to use a specific connection in the Coms SSP CL setup Note See Chapter 7 for coms pinouts and jumper settings EZSetup Used to define simple single input measurements
232. ng the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com STAGE 1 23 G ft AIRTEMP Temp 78 32 GF AIRTEMP Humid 25 32 G TAG STAGE 1 23 GHA AIRTEMP 78 32 G OK Show just the AIRTEMP tag Flash Disk gt SHOW AIRTEMP TAG AIRTEMP 78 32 G OK Zip up the results of a show and transfer it to the PC using Ymodem Flash Disk gt SHOW ZIP Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to abort Show all the sensor values in comma separated format Flash Disk gt SHOW CSV SENSOR BATVAL Battery 12 7813835841049 G V BATVAL Temp 28 7679583945093 G C STAGE 1 23 G f t AIRTEMP Temp 78 3253939059343 G F AIRTEMP Humid 25 3246839763986 G PASSTHRU Command Example Flash Disk gt PASSTHRU COM3 2400 N 8 1 Passthru operation has begun press ESC ESC ESC to abort AT OK RECORDING Command Example Flash Disk gt RECORDING OFF Stopping Recording is OFF Flash Disk gt RECORDING ON Running Recording is ON SET Command Example e The following turns a pump called PUMPON on set it to 1 Flash Disk gt SET PUMPON 1 Flash Disk gt SHOW PUMPON TAG PUMPON a G OK Turn a pump called PUMPON off set it to 0 Flash Disk gt SET PUMPON 0 Flash Disk gt SHOW PUMPON TAG PUMPON 0 G OK 293 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Da
233. nterval of 00 15 00 tells the system to consider data with times 00 00 00 00 15 00 23 45 00 when it is time to format and transmit This is useful for the situation where the block is connected to an output that is providing data more frequently than it is being transmitted It also allows the formatter to identify data that is missing when it comes time to transmit it 236 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The different alarms are Random Group Properties Group 2 A Time 00 00 00 ne Label ere Inter foo 1s 00 Enable Hi Alarm V Hi Limit 5 Enable Low Alarm Low Limit 2 5 ROC Fixed Interval V ROC Mag 3 si ROC Mode off 7 Deadband fa wi Cancel Hi Alarm System goes into alarm if the input value is gt Hi Limit deadband System goes out of alarm if the input value is lt Hi Limit deadband Low Alarm System goes into alarm if the input value is lt Low Limit deadband System goes out of alarm if the input value is gt Low Limit deadband ROC Alarm 1 When ROC Mode is set to Off no ROC alarm test occurs 2 When ROC Mode is set to Hi the system goes into alarm if the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband 3 When ROC Mode is set to Low t
234. ntrol power to the sensor On the Xlite of course AIO and DIO switched 12 are the same thing When set to DIO Chan the module and channel fields are used to determine the digital output used to control power to the sensor 169 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Module and Channel are used to designate the IO module used to control power to the sensor Channel is applicable only when PwrCtrl is set to DIO Chan MRL 7OO Properties Reference fo i Warmup s feo A Cancel Inactivity Ss feo fuss PwrCtrl Dosw Module kO THI Channel ko TH A typical averaging setup using Ezsetup would be as follows Measurement Schedule E Measurement Interval 00 15 00 Measurement Time 00 00 00 Bi Referance E Sampling Interval 00 00 05 Samples to Average 20 Warmup s 30 Cancel AAE ib Inactivity s 10 Measurements per Log MV Enable Log ID PwrCirl DIO Sw If EXE EE Module Cral Channel iil 170 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SENR Net Radiometer Sensors NetRad Inputs lt none gt Outputs NetRad ShortRad Up ShortRadDown LongRad Up LongRadDown Wiring Three sensor types are supported and the wiring differs for each Kipp
235. nts for its tidal stations NFDRS conforms to NFDRS requirements for its fire weather stations INSAT conforms to INSAT requirements for its stations HANDAR is a format where sensors are separated by lt CRLF gt sensor data is separated with a space and missing data is an M The oldest data is first to left as in 010034380517419 21 30G642 0NN155E9200070 Ty 3 dee Les Lass 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 M 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 3 12 3 12 3 Type The Type property defines the satellite type and baud rate for the transmission You can select from GOES 100 CGMA 100 INTI GOES 300 GOES 1200 as well as MSG for METOESAT INSAT and others Time Time is the transmission time assigned to the station Each station will have a unique transmission time rate and channel assigned by NESDIS EUMETSAT or other authorized agency The transmission time is entered in UTC Rate The Rate along with the transmission time determines when transmissions are made The units for the rate are HH MM SS Typical rates are 01 00 00 for hourly transmissions and 04 00 00 for transmissions every 4 hours Window This property defines the size of the window in HH MM SS that is given for the transmission Satlink only uses this window size if the box Center in Window is checked Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Random Dialo
236. nvert Output 244 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Pulse Out PulseOut Inputs In Outputs Out Description This block is used to generate a pulse on a digital output for a short duration defined by Pulse time A new pulse will be output each time the block is executed with an input value that is non zero The normal state of the digital output pulse will be OFF ON OFF If invert is selected the pulse will be ON OFF ON Where ON input grounded OFF Pull up to internal V depends on channel see appendix for detailed specs Note any pulse in progress when recording is stopped is terminated and so may end prematurely Pulse Properties Digital 1 0 Module F x OK Channel 2 Cancel Pulse Width is E d Invert Pulse Use the Digital I O Module and Channel properties to set the module and channel Do not use channel 1 or channel 8 Set the width of the desired pulse in the Pulse Width property fractional seconds are accepted e g 0 1 NOTE If using a digital io module with version 2 03 or earlier DO NOT use pulses of 1 second or less e g use 1 1 or more Starting with 2 5 more accurate pulses are used via the modules built in pulse function In version 2 03 and earlier this does not work as it corrupts other channels 245 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the
237. ny usernames and passwords in the Xpert you will be prompted to enter a username and password in order to issue commands to remote exe 282 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Table of remote commands Command Description ABOUT Shows the same information as the Xpert s Status tab About button CAL sensor value Calibrate sensor using value Where sensor is the name of the block and must be a unique name see rename for details For example to calibrate a sensor block named stage to value 15 5 ex cal stage 15 5 CD path Change directory COPY src dest Copy a file A wildcard character may be used as part of the src to match one or more files but then dest should contain the name of a folder If a path contains spaces it must be surrounded in double quotes ex copy usb card flash disk DATE mm dd yyyy Displays or sets the date E mm dd yyyy hh mm ss CSV YMODEM ZIP C REVERSE BAD INVERT OLDEST NEWEST TODAY YESTERDAY WEEK MONTH YEAR HOUR DEFAULT Exits and runs Windows Remote COM1 115200 DEL file Delete file DIR path Display directory GET sensor list F Shows archived log data Specifying a sensor list will cause logfile only those sensors to be displayed aa ee ay e F speci
238. o be acknowledged Voice Modem Settings This is the Voice Modem settings screen Voice Modem Settings Answer voice x l arane Eoen TE Phone 1 Lal Phone 2 ua Dice Additional phone s Messages Redial Delay 00 01 00 Redials g Dial Out When an alert occurs each phone number is tried in sequence starting with Phone 1 until an acknowledgement occurs Or until the Redials has been attempted on each number The Answer mode can be configured to answer in Voice Data or Voice amp Data The Voice amp Data mode prompts when it answers the phone to Please press pound If the person dialing in presses the key on the telephone a voice message is spoken otherwise a data carrier is transmitted and a data connection is attempted The Dial in and Dial out buttons allow the Dial in and Dial out messages to be configured Speech phrases are stored in the Flash Disk speech English directory or Flash Disk speech language directory depending on which language is selected Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com By default the voice modem will speak the specified Dial Out message If the modem is unable to detect ring back it may start speaking a phrase before someone answers the phone Because of this the message spoken should either be repeated or wait for a button to be pushed before speaking the al
239. on Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Self Timed Properties Enable SelfTimed Append Lat Lon Center in Window Append Batt voltage Channel fs lz Time foo 00 00 f Num Vals f l Rate 04 00 00 l Format SHEF x Window foo 02 00 Type 300 bps x Antenna YAGI 10 1 Enable Self Timed This box must be checked for the system to make self timed transmissions This field is sent to the Satlink to configure it and uses the field to control its own scheduling Center in Window This box instructs Satlink to center each timed transmission in the transmission window Normally a transmitter has a transmission window that is larger than the length of the transmission it must make When Center in Window is selected Satlink will delay each transmission so it is centered in the window The Window size is entered in the Window Property on this dialog Append Lat Lon Satlink transmitters have a GPS Global Positioning System receiver which is cable of determining its latitude and longitude This check box instructs Satlink to add the Latitude and Longitude to the end of each transmission Append Batt Voltage This check box configures Satlink to append the loaded Battery voltage taken at last TX to the end of the transmission Channel This property defines the channel that Satlink will use to make the self timed transmission Num Vals This property defines the number of values to inclu
240. on Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ANALOG I O MODULE 8080 0007 The 8080 0007 Analog I O Module ADC has ten analog I O lines an excitation voltage switched battery output and built in transient protection Features e Ten inputs configurable as 10 single ended channels or 5 differential inputs or a combination of single ended and differential inputs e 16 bit resolution e Input gain settings for increased resolution for low level signals Single Ended 0 5 V 78 mV 19 5 mV ADC Block Voltage HiGain x128 Differential 2 5V 78 mV 19 5 mV ADC Block Voltage HiGain x128 Continuous self calibration One switched battery sensor power output Industrial temperature range operation 40 to 60 C Multiple sampling rates and digital filtering Viewing the card from the front the plug assignments are as follows EN Oc 10 G Vref G cm 1 3 3 5 5 7 7 9 9 10 10 G Ground SwBat switched battery out 12V nominal Vref 2 5V excitation voltage only on when the module is measuring Differential channel pairs are 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 The higher voltage line goes to the measured channel Transient Protection Installation Note The two rear 6 32 mounting screws provide the earth grounding point for the internal spark gap transient protection of the analog inputs For maximum transient protection a good earth ground needs to be provided to at least one of these screws 265
241. on name or a station with full path information included such as patha pathb stationx When the Port selection is TCP IP enter the URL to the destination The Tag property must match the name specified in a COMS Tag in the named station For example Station is measuring water level and Station 2 wants to get the water level for its own use Add a COMS Tag after the measure of the water level in Station 1 Set the COMS TAG Name property as WaterLevel In Station 2 add a GetTag block connected to a measure In the GETTAG properties set the Tag property to WaterLevel Also set the port and path for the link between the two stations Now whenever the GetTag block runs the code will communicate to the named station and ask for WaterLevel The station will reply with the data for WaterLevel and then the GetTag block will provide the data to connected blocks Tag Properties Port com1 7 Path URL i a Tag waterLevel Cancel 160 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com GillWind Gill Wind Sensor Inputs lt none gt Outputs WindSpeed WindDirection Wiring Connect the sensor to a RS232 port as follows wiring is shown for the 6461 1239 protection board Connector Name Pin 6461 1239 2 V 12 6 5 TXD RXD 2 7RXD TXD 3 1 GND 3 V GND 5 Note Set jumper J3 on the 6461 1239
242. or example if you had an EZSetup measurement schedule with the BinIn block Event checked and an sdi 12 sensor every time the BinIn detected a change of state the SDI 12 sensor would also be measured Graphical Setup The Graphical Setup branch of the Setup tab is used to manage the portion of the system s setup that has been defined by interconnecting graphical blocks where each block represents a function such as sensor measure or log This method of setup should be used to define sensors Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com that can t be setup using the EZSetup Measurements This would include sensors that need to have a polynomial interpolation table or any other special processing done to them See the section in Appendix A that covers Processing blocks to see all the available processing See Chapter 4 Setup Diagrams for detailed descriptions of how to set up sensors in this way This is also where setups defined with versions before 2 0 0 0 will be loaded Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status E2Setup Measurements a Graphical Setup 01 IntBat 00 15 00 Next unknown New 1 0 Modules LAN Settings Log files Satlink Self test v Compile Edit The details of whatever measurements have been graphically defined will be displayed underneath the Graphical Setup main branch Some of the
243. orked though the Xpert can have multiple measurement schedules Each measurement schedule has a set of sensors assigned to it Whenever the measurement schedule executes the sensors are measured In the example above two measurement schedules have been defined The first schedule will measure AirTemp and TipBckt every 15 minutes The second will measure BattVolt every hour You can see the next measurement of AirTemp and TipBckt will occur at 11 15 00 and that the last measured values for each of these parameters were 15 6F and OMM Note this status information does not update automatically To update select the root entry EZSetup Measurements and press the Refresh button Editing a measurement or sensor requires recording to be turned off When you try to create or edit a measurement or sensor the system will prompt you to stop recording When the create or edit is complete the system will prompt you to restart recording The measurements and sensors you define in EzSetup are stored in the Xpert setup file If a setup file has been defined it is saved automatically after making changes to EzSetup and leaving the Setup tab You may also explicitly save the setup by selecting the Setup entry and pressing the Save As button Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Measurement Schedules To create a new mea
244. othing else can be done with the unit an hourglass is displayed during log file creation On SD cards with Gigabyte capacities creating larger log files will take MUCH longer To create a 100 megabyte 104857600 bytes as entered log file the unit will take about 7 minutes to create a 1 Gigabyte log file expect the unit to be busy for over an hour Use Flash disk filename log to store log files into internal flash Use USB Card filename log to store file onto a USB thumb drive Use SD Card filename log to store file onto an SD storage card Sizing Logs Since each logged data point takes between ten and fifteen bytes of memory a log file 60 000 bytes in size will hold between 4000 and 6000 data points or between 1 5 and 2 months of a single sensor measurement made every 15 minutes You can change the size of an existing log from the Log File Properties dialog The size can be increased without losing any data currently in the log If the size is decreased you will lose some of the data in the log If you are decreasing the size of the log you may want to retrieve the data from the log so it is not lost Note the minimum log size is 2048 bytes The maximum log size is the lesser of 1 2 billion bytes or 2 the free space available on the storage medium minus a small safety buffer 32k for storage cards 192k for Flash Disk Export Log Options Pressing the Expt Opt button on the Log File Properties dialog brings u
245. ow lists the name of the file location name log the size of the file and whether or not the file should wrap You can create a new dialog by pressing New or edit the properties of a log file by highlighting the file and pressing Edit In both cases the following dialog is shown Log File Properties free 27271 KB Filename Size bytes K wrap ese 144 fast _ Ignore Bad Dats OK Cancel The file size is the maximum size of the log file in bytes Wrap specifies what should happen once the file has been filled up to its maximum size If wrapping is set to Yes and the file fills up the system will delete some of the old data to make room for the new data This way the log file will always be full of the most recent data If wrapping is set to No and the file fills up the system will not store the additional data in the log and the new data will be lost Note that Wrap can only be set when creating a new log Ignore Bad Data when checked means don t log any data unless it has good quality G Pressing the Expt Opt button will bring up the Export Log Options dialog See below for a description of this dialog Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Creating New Logs When creating a new log it might take a minute or two after pressing OK for the file to be initialized During this time n
246. ower up the Xpert Press Ctrl C in response to the message Press Ctrl C to skip execution of Autoexec bat You should then see Bypassing flash disk Autoexec bat running Remote in the next few lines If you do not simply repeat this step until you do 4 If you intend to use ethernet and the ethernet port lights are off issue the command lanon If you intend to perform serial transfers close the terminal program In any case run XTerm and connect to the Xpert 5 Press the XTerm File Transfer button on the right of the XTerm display This will bring up a dialog showing a list of Xpert files in the right pane and a list of PC files in the left pane Make sure the right pane is showing files in the Flash Disk subdirectory 6 Change the directory in the left pane to the directory containing the upgrade files and select the files you want to send to the Xpert note you can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key with each new selection 7 Press the gt button to transfer the files to the Xpert Press OK to start the transfer and wait for the transfer to complete 8 When finished reboot the Xpert NOTE Xpert app now contains some additional checks to ensure the correct version of ssI dll is loaded If the app detects an incorrect version it WILL NOT load that sll dll If this happens a warning message is shown on boot up and a warning message will be placed into the system log indicating what version
247. own list allows you to select from all LogRec blocks in the system so far Or you can type the name of a LogRec block you intend to create by clicking on the button next to the drop down Note that LogField blocks are attached to LogRec blocks by way of Record ID Hence if there are two LogRec blocks in the system with the same name you will see two entries for the name in the drop down list but selecting either one adds the field to both records The Sequence property defines the order in which this field will appear in the logged record When you press the change button the system initializes the change dialog with the next available sequence number for the current Record ID 229 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Right Digits specifies the number of places to the right of the decimal point the value logged should have Note that this applies only to numeric data If the value being logged is non numeric a string this property is ignored The Format string property defines what the formatted output will look like in the logged record The drop down list provides several different formats to choose from however you can specify a custom format string by clicking on the change button next to the list The format string combines formatting tags with literal characters Formatting tags are always of the for
248. ows extra measurements to be taken which are not all logged For instance a value of 4 with a 00 15 00 interval would cause the 9210 to measure every 15 minutes but log the specified sensor only every hour ENABLE This button is a quick way to disable a measurement if there s a temporary issue that doesn t warrant completely deleting it LOG ID When this field contains a string all sensors associated with this measurement are logged as a group with the Log ID used as the data set s name When the Log ID field is empty all items are logged separately each with it s own time stamp units and quality data NOTE The maximum size of a log entry is 2048 bytes Hence be careful to not create a Log ID that results in an entry larger than that Also note that only 256 bytes of data can be shown for each log entry on the Log tab Of course all 2048 bytes are included in an export of the log After creating or editing a measurement schedule it s tree entry is shown collapsed Expand the entry by clicking the plus sign This will show all the sensors assigned to the schedule The order in which the sensors appear is important as it determines the order in which the sensors are measured and logged Sensor Configuration A new sensor is added to a measurement schedule by selecting New Sensor and pressing Edit To edit an existing sensor select the entry and press Edit To delete a sensor select it and press Del
249. p www sutron com Frequency Freq Inputs lt none gt Outputs Freq Wiring Connect the sensor frequency output to the selected CH1 CH8 of the digital module Connect the sensor GND to GND Description This block outputs the frequency of a digital input signal First select the Digital I O Module and the channel number Channels have a maximum frequency of 1KHz The field Multiplier is normally left at one unless the cycles per second output of the frequency is to be changed For example to changing to cycles per minute enter 0 0167 for this field The Period mostly has to do with when the block takes instantaneous as opposed to continuous frequency readings For instantaneous readings the Frequency block takes two time count readings from the I O module at Period time apart and used these to calculate the frequency of the signal The longer the value entered for Period the greater the accuracy of the frequency because of averaging but the less instantaneous the reading with be When the frequency is being sampled frequently by a Measure or Average block it might make sense to only take one time count reading from the I O module every pass and calculate the frequency from the current and previous readings For a sampling interval of 1 second this would be the same as having the Period set to 1 000 If this is desired un check Take Two Readings at a Time and set Period to 1 000 The Xpert will use the previous
250. p www sutron com the list This menu is accessed on the PocketPC by tapping and holding the stylus on the list for a second or two The desktop PC version also provides buttons to access these operations To move a file from the PC to the Xpert select the file in the PC window and either press the gt button or select Send to Xpert from the menu To move a file from the Xpert to the PC select the file in the Xpert window and either press the lt button or select Get from Xpert from the menu On the desktop PC you can select multiple files by pressing CTRL and then selecting the file with the mouse or by pressing SHIFT and then selecting the file with the mouse to select a range of files On the PocketPC you can select multiple files by pressing and holding the Action button while you tap additional files The Action button is typically the largest button on the device below the screen See your PocketPC documentation for further information Use either the Sel All button or the Select All menu item to select all items in the list Use either the Delete button or the Delete menu item to delete files on either the PC or Xpert Use either the Run button or the Run menu item to run a program on the Xpert Note that it is not possible to run a program with command line arguments in this way Note that all times displayed on the right side of the file transfer dialog top on the Pocket PC are s
251. p the following dialog used to define options related to exporting a log file Export Log Options Use val for bad data V Include station header Print NOTE Log Records Print RecordID before date V Include field header _ Include units header F Cancel When Use val for bad data is checked all data marked with Bad quality B is replaced with the supplied value on export Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When Include station header is checked the export will contain a header containing the station name This makes it easy to identify which station the export came from When Print NOTE is checked log notes will be exported and displayed in log tab with NOTE in the sensor field and the note text in the data field By default this option is not checked meaning NOTE is not printed and the note text is displayed in the sensor field When Print RecordID before date is checked the RecordID field for all log records if any is printed before the date and time When Include field header is checked the exported file contains a header describing the format of each log record field if any When Include units header is checked the exported file contains a header that lists the units assigned to each log record field if any Example Header H
252. parated by Burst Rate number of seconds Values This property defines the number of values to include in the random transmission This value is used for the BIN INT transmission format to set the number of values to send for each sensor E G If set to 32 and 4 sensors are sending data then a total of 128 data values are sent other formats will use the NUM VALUES defined in the random parameter blocks in the setup The number entered here will also set the default value when placing a random parameter block into the setup for BIN NONINT format Self Timed Test The Self Timed Test dialog is used to make a test transmission see the selected format of a self timed transmission and see the detailed status of the transmitter Pressing the Send button makes test transmissions Before pressing Send Satlink must be set up with valid information on both the Satlink dialog and Satlink self time dialogs Test transmissions should only be made on special test channels or with the Satlink connected to a dummy load Otherwise the transmission may interfere with other stations The test message that will be sent is displayed in the text box to the left of the send button Change the message by selecting custom and then changing the message using the control Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com If the setup has been entered this dialog will display the
253. ponent when Model is either CNR 2 or CNR 4 use this drop down to select which component to configure using AIO Channel and Sensitivity AIO Channel the channel to which the sensor s V signal is connected When Model is either CNR 2 or CNR 4 the channel applies to the selected Input Sensitivity the sensitivity of the selected signal When Model is either CNR 2 or CNR 4 the sensitivity applies to the selected Input Temperature When CNR 4 is selected configure the block to measure temperature by selecting the Temp button and entering the AIO module and channel to which the temp signals have been connected Also enter the value of the completion resistor in ohms you used when wiring up the thermistor 172 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com NetRad Temperature AIO Module 2 v AIO Channel fo 7 Compl Res 10000 ai Heater and Ventilator The CNR 4 optionally includes a Heater and Ventilator The heater can be used to melt frost and the ventilator is used to provide efficient air flow over the domes and windows to minimize the formation of dew and reduce the frequency of cleaning The following dialog shows the properties used to configure CNR 4 heater operation Ventilator configuration occurs in the NetRad Ventilator dialog which looks and functions exactly the same NetRad Heater Enable He
254. process has requested the LAN to be on and so on Press the View Config button to view details IP address DNS server etc about the current connection When you press the Settings button the system will ask whether you want to run the Network Wizard which will ask several questions and then set LAN settings based on your answers If you answer No to running the wizard you instead are prompted with a dialog from which you can manually configure network properties Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Network Properties Obtain an IP address via DHCP Specify an IP address IP Address 169 254 12 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway Name Servers The Network Properties dialog is used to specify how the Xpert gets an IP address Typically when the Xpert is connected to a network that provides DHCP services select Obtain an IP address via DHCP If DHCP services are not available or if you desire a static IP address for other reasons select Specify an IP address and enter the IP address and Subnet Mask You can press the Name Servers button to enter DNS and WINS address information if desired HAR Crossover Connections An ethernet crossover cable is a special kind of ethernet cable that acts similar to a null modem cable where TX and RX are crossed in order to facilitate host to host
255. program or by accessing the main menu and pressing CLEAR on the Alarm OFF item Re enables alarm transmissions that have been disabled with DisableAlarms Hangsup the phone and terminates the speech command Inputs a number from the user The number is entered with the DTMF keypad may be used to specify a decimal point Press the button is used to indicate the end Pressing twice will allow the number to be re entered See SpeakManual and StoreManual Example 12 345 would enter the number 12 345 Negative numbers are not supported Labels a section of the speech command two types of labels exist User and DTMF DTMF labels are branched to in response to the BranchDTMF command and user labels are branched to using the Branch command Switches to the specified language folder This effects all speech phrases that may be spoken ex SpeakPhrase and SpeakData after the command When adding phrases be sure to select the appropriate language using the combo box at the bottom of the screen Using subroutines see Call and Return commands it s possible to create a single phrase that can be spoken in multiple languages The key is to select the language with the Language command and then Call the bi multi lingual phrase For this to work the vox speech files must be given the same name across the languages Delays the speech command for the specified number of seconds resolution down to milliseconds
256. ption provides opportunity for user to measure power consumption while the system is in its deepest sleep Verify RTC Communication verifies communication with external RTC Verify Physical Memory verifies the correct amount of memory is present Verify Flash Disk verifies the correct amount of storage memory is present Verify Watch Dog verifies the watch dog timer counter is counting within range Verify COM ports verifies com port operation Verify I2C Devices verifies expected I2C devices are present test on Xpert requires presence of at least one I O module to pass e Verify Battery Voltage verifies battery voltage is 12V 2V Pressing the Edit button with the SelfTest branch selected brings up the following dialog that controls what optional tests are to be run Self test Properties V External loopbacks connected M SD Card read write test cancel V USB Drive read write test M Power consumption test 5x max Run M Xlite display button test V Xlite 1 0 module test External loopbacks connected The system expects the following e Null modem cable connecting COM2 and COM3 e Null modem cable connecting COM6 and COM7 if present e Null modem cable connecting COM8 and COM9 if present Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com e External loopback connector on COM4 which connects RTS to C
257. ption is used to open existing setup files Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Save As The Save As option is used to save current settings to a file with a different name A large number of setups can be stored limited only by the available Flash memory To save a setup under a new name click the Edit with Save As in the Setup tab selected The following window will appear The Up button is used to move up one level in the directory tree structure Use it to get to any installed storage cards which will be displayed as one of SD Card or USB Card To change the filename for the setup file being saved click the change button and using the virtual keypad to enter the desired name of the file Append The Append option is used to append blocks from another setup file to the current one Note that only blocks are appended No other settings from the setup file selected are imported e g Satlink settings remain unchanged after appending a new setup file Note The system saves the setup file as changes are made so that it is never necessary to perform an explicit save and hence there is no Save option Users The Users branch of the setup tab is used to manage the list of user login accounts to the system Pressing Edit with this branch selected brings up a window with all the users accounts that have been adde
258. put of the headwater and tailwater levels in reservoirs ManualEntry sll This SLL adds a block that allows the user to enter observed data measurements manually Modbus sll The purpose of this SLL is to add the ability to communicate via modbus to the Xpert 9210 For more information see the document Xpert Modbus SLL User Manual available under separate cover NIFC sll The purpose of this SLL is to provide the necessary blocks to connect sensors used in Fire Weather applications Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com NOS sll This SLL implements a reporting mechanism for NOS stations using the user login and a data file to determine the report contents In addition this sll adds average and measure blocks that allow data time stamps to be centered on the interval Pflow sll This SLL implements custom pump flow rate and duration calculations PPP sll This SLL adds support for PPP and SLIP protocols as well as support for SSP messaging over related devices PPSaver sll This SLL implements custom power saving measurement and communication algorithms for Poland Power project QFE sll This SLL adds a sensor block used to calculate standard atmosphere based on elevation QuadW sll This SLL adds the QuadW sensor block used to measure a quadrature sensor connected to a Weeder Tech
259. r EE E ra ar Re RS 232 MOU PAE E casa E E 005 bear be GE E E aor RSE ct ES aa eH Speech Modem LOS Radio 0006 Satlink Transmitter APPENDIX G AUTOEXEC BAT AND REMOTE LEXE cscccsssssssssesscscssssscsssscssvsesseneeseseeesseseesesseseesessesees 279 AUTOEXEC BAT ssrinii 03 n E E E E E ca veudeseesvetvest EEE E ES EE EEIEIEE a REMOTE EXE miraire sina vn sec e ES E TA E EEE a E E E EE TE ABOUT Command Examples rsin n A aA EE e E Ea EE a O A E AN AT Er EE Get Command Example cc cece cece ceeeseceecseeeeeeseenes INFO command Example c cece ceeceeesceseceeeeeseeeseeees MAIL Command Example cceceeeeesseseeseeseeeeserseeneens MEASURE SHOW Command Example PASSTHRU Command Example eeeseseseeeeeeeeeneees RECORDING Command Example c cece eeeeeeeeseees SET Command Example nske SHUTDOWN Command Example 0 0 eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee STARTUP Command Example 0 0 ee eeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeees STATION Command Examples soinn cea ccessStacevecsepssse vnbduersrtendcdnssiicetresesens ctansoavveesns Stesonssbeeseotdindonsguveseneedcguansucvees STATUS Command Examples arenan a a AE tars R se vines fens AE fea aa as eee tes eee cians UPGRADE Command Example YMODEM Command Example APPENDIX H DIMENSIONS vacancia a EA A EA AE XPFRZ DATA LOGGER h rerea ee OE E E ETET A OON EE EI EENE OEE EAE ETES a 296 IO MODU ES r n a a aa aa r e a an aaa 298 PAIT A MODEM AEREE TA E ETE ET AE E A ET EE ETET AT E
260. r more sensors exceed their alarm limits Alert A condition which when triggered will cause the system to transmit immediate messages Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com An Alert can be configured to occur when a sensor goes in to alarm out of alarm or both When an Alert occurs the Alarm Status on the Main menu turns to ALERT The system will then attempt to send an alarm message to the various configured devices By default the software will try a Direct Connect first then a LOS Radio a Speech Voice modem and then finally a Data Modem If at any time the ALERT is acknowledged the system status will change to ALARM or NORMAL and the transmissions will stop OFF will be displayed if alarm transmissions have been disabled by for instance a voice modem user or a Basic program The Direct Connect LOS Radio SSP and RS485 blocks are also capable of sending alarm messages on a regular interval There can be one interval for when the system is in ALARM and another for when everything is NORMAL The Clear button on MAIN TAB is used to acknowledge an ALERT condition manually causing any alert transmissions to cease If the system is still in ALARM that condition may be cleared as well by pressing the Clear button again and the system should return to NORMAL until the next measurement occurs and any alarms are redetected If ALERT transmi
261. re and need an excitation voltage A programmable excitation is available that is turned on during the measurement by checking the Excitation On box Any of the 6 analog channels can also provide the excitation output Select which channel to use as well as the appropriate excitation voltage When needed the Xpert will measure the excitation output voltage NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION Voltage Single Ended Sensor Vout connect to any analog channel CH1 CH6 Voltage Differential Sensor V V connect to any pair of analog Channels CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 or CH5 CH6 The lower channel of each pair is for the connection on the Xpert and should be the channel that is measured Current 4 20 ma Connect the sensor to Vbat or 12 SW Connect the other end of the sensor to the selected analog channel CH1 CH6 12 2 CHANNEL DC Resistance General Information Resistance measurements always require excitation on and a selection for the excitation voltage The excitation channel may be different from the measurement channel for 3 and 4 wire measurements DC Resistance 2 wire Set excitation channel to match input channel 136 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Connect one end of the resistor to the selected analog channel CH1 CHxx Connect the other end of the resistor to GND Vi Vx Rs GN
262. re more than one output of a multi output sensor you must set up a separate sensor entry for each output to be measured When each output is set up properly the system makes only one measurement of the sensor as opposed to a separate measurement for each output This is especially important for sensors that take a significant time to measure imagine taking 5 separate measurements to obtain 5 parameters from an SDI sensor that takes 30 seconds to measure In addition for some sensors it may be important to ensure parameters were measured at the same time Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To ensure only one measurement is made for all outputs of a single sensor the I O device configuration for each sensor entry representing a separate output must be the same The I O device configuration consists of different parameters for different types of sensors If the sensor reads an analog input then the analog input s module and channel must be the same If the sensor reads a com port to obtain its input then the com port must be the same For SDI 12 sensor s the SDI 12 address and command must be the same Note the I O device configuration must be set the same when creating the sensor entry Changing the configuration to be the same after the entry has been made does not result in linking any outputs In the example below the Dir and Spe
263. re to set the correct Address SDI Properties Address Command Mo Slope fi Offset bo units JE CDIP Defined File Format The block produces the following CDIP defined file format based input and output data files 1 Spectral data SP file 2 Time series data df file The CDIP file format can be found here http cdip ucsd edu nav documents amp sub index amp units metric amp tz UTC amp pub public amp map_st ati 1 2 3 amp xitem product files Sample Spectral Data file File Name sp07601199801091641 Analyzed UTC 2013 06 25 0103 hrs Station Name Sutron Sterling Office Location 35 12 50 N 120 51 60 W Sensor Type Sutron Radar Level Recorder Water Depth m 23 MLLW Sensor Depth m N A Sensor Elev m 230 Shore Normal deg N A Source File df07600199801091708 Sample Length s 2048 Sample Rate Hz 1 0 Hs m 1 27 Tp s 15 38 Dp deg N A Ta s 5 56 freq Band energy Hz width m m Hz 0 015625 0 03125 0 18 0 046875 0 03125 2 75 0 078125 0 03125 0 85 0 109375 0 03125 1 45 0 140625 0 03125 0 90 0 171875 0 03125 1 28 0 203125 0 03125 0 84 0 234375 0 03125 0 56 0 265625 0 03125 1 18 0 296875 0 03125 2 70 0 328125 0 03125 0 21 04359375 0 03125 2 32 0 390625 0 03125 2 66 0 421875 0 03125 0 41 0 453125 0 03125 2 00 0 484375 0 03125 1 23 224 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com
264. reading as long as it was taken within the time range of Period Period 4 of the current time Be careful how you set Period when Take Two Readings is unchecked The smaller you make Period the more likely the system will still take two measurements even though Take Two Readings is not checked You should not make Period longer than the sampling interval of your measure or average block or you will slow down data to the block If you always want to use the previous reading to compute the frequency regardless of when it was measured use the COUNTER block The block scales the outputs according to the values of S ope and Offset using the equation output reading slope offset The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors page For the calibration the user will enter the current value The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained 157 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Frequency Properties DIO Mod 1 7 Slope f f Channel 1 7 Offset f s Period ms 200 la Units Hz A Take 2 readings V Cancel 158 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Fuel Moisture FM Inputs lt none gt Output
265. rent types of setup blocks Now click Input to bring up a list of the available input blocks Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com AirTemp AT RH ADC Barom BEIEnc BinIn Use Sree v j H H Acard wizard i Cancel K Scroll up or down to find the input block labeled RMYoung For now leave the checkbox next to Use Wizard checked and click OK Now the main setup display will look like this F zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit RM Youn MeasureLog By using the Wizard we can see that not only has the RMYoung sensor block has been added to the setup screen but a measure block and log block as well with connections The exact blocks that are automatically added with the Wizard are customizable with the Wizard button in the Add Input window above Adding Additional Blocks Looking carefully we see that only one of the outputs from the RMYoung block will be sampled and logged with this arrangement Zooming in on this block indicates it is the wind speed output Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com RM Young Measure To also sample and log wind speed we need to create another instance of the measurement and log blocks and connect them to the wind direction output of the RMYoung block To do this f
266. requency Set the sample period of the Freq block to 200mS The VWC calculation can be compensated for the current soil temperature if desired To do so connect a block measuring the current soil temperature to the Soil Temperature input of the CS625WCR block You may choose to use a Const block providing a constant value if soil temperature does not change enough to require additional compensation The diagram below shows a typical graphical setup of the CS625WCR block compensated for soil temperature using a constant value entered into the Const block To compensate for soil temperature using a measured value replace the Const block with a sensor block configured to measure the current soil temperature To assume a constant soil temperature of 20 C do not connect any block to the Soil Temperature input Properties 202 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The CS625WCR block properties dialog is shown below CS625WCR Properties Sensor Enable OK E None Module j 7 Channel 2 7 Soil Type Standard Loam 7 co f K Sensor Enable controls how the sensor is enabled for measurement If None is selected the sensor is not enabled automatically the sensor should be wired so it is always enabled though this does result in more power consumption When SW12 is selected the sensor e
267. review the Air Temperature block to see if it directly supports the thermistor to be measured Volts HiGain When you select the Volts HiGain measurement type a voltage measurement is made using hi gain The maximum input voltage is 312mV when measuring using the 8080 0003 Analog IO module and is 78mV when measuring using the 8080 0007 Analog IO module Volts x128 When you select the Volts x128 measurement type a voltage measurement is made using very high gain The maximum input voltage is 39mV when measuring using the 8080 0003 Analog IO module and is 19mV when measuring using the 8080 0007 Analog IO module Differential measurements can be made for each of the above Measurement choices If you specify a differential measurement be sure to select only channels 1 3 or 5 140 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To enable an excitation channel click Excitation On and then select the channel number to use and the voltage level to output Xpert can generate excitation voltages on any channel 1 6 Filter notch This is a built in noise filter the defaults of 60 should work for many measurements If AC line noise becomes an issue lowering this value will help reduce the noise Lowering this value will also make measurements take longer Settling Time This is the amount of time in milliseconds to leave the A D circuitry switched 12
268. rol and how to initialize them s Autoexec bat Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Backup the registry in preparation for upgrading the kernel which re inits registry by default The delay is designed to make sure launch is finished backing up the registry before continuing Launch automatically restores the registry on its next execution at boot which occurs after kernel upgrade s Xpert2 fil g Windows Launch exe BACKUP AutoReg dat FILTER Xpert2 fil QUIET saving registry h 4 saving registry d Xpert2 fil Upgrade the kernel The upgrade occurs serially and will take tens of minutes due to the size of the file k Xpert2 ker kernel Upgrade the loader 1 Xpert2 lod loader Upgrade MicroMonitor This upgrade is disabled by default As a general rule do not enable this step unless directed to do so by someone at Sutron u Xpert2 mon umon The commands used in the script are p set default source directory d delete the specified file Nn send the specified file g run the specified executable file on the Xpert h delay for the specified number of seconds u upgrade MicroMonitor 1 upgrade the loader k upgrade the kernel b reboot Format of commands 255 CMD LET
269. rol the speech and interact with a caller The user can record custom phrases and words to augment the standard vocabulary using standard PC hardware and software LOS Radio The recorder has a serial port for connecting LOS Radio modems The port is compatible with third party radio modems such as those manufactured by MDS Using a radio modem provides one or two way communications between nodes or a central station The modem makes it possible for the remote connection to perform all functions as though the module were local to the system Two nodes may use radio communications over a short distance to eliminate expensive wiring At other times radio communications will be used between the nodes and a central station The radio modems must be compatible with repeaters in cases where there is not a clear line of sight between two nodes Satlink Transmitter The recorder has a serial port for connecting a Sutron Satlink transmitter The recorder will set up and operate the satellite radio through the serial port The setup includes specifying of the transmit mode ID time interval setting the time making test transmissions etc Operations include loading data for transmission logging transmission status and exceptions synchronizing clocks etc 213 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix E Software Development Kit SDK OVERVIEW
270. ron com Xpert com 5 9 Optional Quad Serial board Each of the pin 9 power outputs is individually fused and each can provide up to 300mA across the rated temperature range The fuse is a self resetting type that will automatically pass power through when the overload short circuit has been removed Switched power settings The switched power can be set to 5 volts or 12 volts input power This switched power is turned on when the com port is opened and turned off when the com port is closed If it is desired to provide a switched power then the software must open the com port when communications need to take place and leave them enabled until the response is received 125 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com COMMON MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Calibrate the Touchscreen There are two ways to start the touch screen calibration program Using XTerm select the program windows touchcal exe Before pressing RUN hold a stylus on the touch screen in the upper left corner Then press RUN As soon as you hear the tones from the Xpert remove the stylus The touch screen calibration screen will appear Power off the Xpert Then turn on the power holding a stylus in the upper left corner As soon as you hear tones from the Xpert remove the stylus The touch screen calibration screen will appear Once the calibration program is running
271. roperty defines how often random transmissions will be made when the unit is in alarm following burst transmission s The rate is specified in HH MM SS Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Burst Rt The Burst Rate property defines how often the Burst random transmissions will be made These burst transmissions occur when the unit first goes into alarm The rate is specified in HH MM SS Format Several formats are supported for random transmissions Bin Int is a binary interleaved format identical to the 8210 binary transmission format The data are in the 6 bit pseudo binary format required by NESDIS Bin NonInt is a binary non interleaved format This format also uses the 6 bit pseudo binary format but allows different amounts of data to be sent for each sensor The data is not interleaved i e one sensor s data set appears together in the transmission Channel This property defines the channel that Satlink will use to make the random transmission Type This property defines the baud rate for the transmission The valid selections are 100 and 300 Burst The Burst property defines how many transmissions Satlink will make when the unit first goes into alarm This value is normally set to one When set to a value other than one Satlink will make this number of transmissions with each transmission se
272. rs Up to four quadrature shaft encoders may be set up The input lines must come from adjacent inputs starting with an odd numbered one e g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Each shaft encoder has a 32 bit counter associated with it It counts up for one direction of rotation and down for the other 269 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Outputs Each of the six lines with output capability can be turned on or off under control of the logger Any output can be pulsed using the pulse output command 270 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix D Specifications 271 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Basic Unit with Display 8080 0000 1B 8080 0000 2B and 8080 0000 3B Processor 32 bit ARM9 core Memory 1 MB boot ROM 64MB Flash 32MB for OS and 32MB flash file system for log 32MB SDRAM Power 10 to 16 VDC recommended 20 VDC max 140 mA display and backlight on 40 mA active display amp backlight off lt 3 mA quiescent Clock TCXO Real time clock with battery backup 10 seconds month accuracy 40 to 60C Display 320x240 transflective LCD Touchscreen overlay for LCD 20C to 60C viewable VO I2C bus 100Kbps 5 wire 10ft max SDI 12 Rev 1
273. rt The Right Digits property controls the precision of the tagged data but only when the check box is checked Coms Tag Properties x Prefix m 5 Suffix M Right Digits f EH Note In order to take live measurements of the sensors with which the Coms Tag is inline there must be no active blocks between the Coms Tag and the inline sensor block Generally speaking this means the Coms Tag must be connected after the sensor block and before any Measure Average or other active block an active block is one that initiates a measurement and typically has a darkened border in the graphical setup If the Coms Tag is connected after the active block it will not be able to retrieve live data 235 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Random Group RndGroup Inputs Trigger Outputs Output pass through Description This block defines the alarm conditions for a random transmission group Its input is typically connected to a sensor that the system is measuring Each time the sensor is measured and the data is passed to the random group block the block will check the value for the different type of alarms and trigger an alarm or go out of alarm as determined by the data If more than one RndGroup block is used to define a trigger point for the same group each RndGroup block must have the same DTime DInter and
274. rt Connect the sensor as shown in the table below PB200 Pin PB200 Pin Name Wire Color RS485 Connection RS232 Connection 1 V Red V V see PwrCtrl 2 V Black V V 3 A OUT White RS485A Tx 7 A IN Yellow RS485A Rx 8 B IN Orange RS485B N C 9 B OUT Blue RS485B N C Configuration The PB200 properties dialog shown below is used to configure operation of the PB200 block 174 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PB200 Properties Com port coma 7 C RS 485 Cancel PwrCtrl pio CHAN 7 Module p 7 Mo Channel hko TH Warmup 5 feo E Inactivity s feo fad Com Port and RS 485 Use the Com Port property to select the port on which you ve connected the PB200 200WX sensor If you ve connected the sensor to an RS485 port then check the RS 485 option note COM4 and COM6 COM9 are available as RS485 by factory option on the Xpert Power Control The PwrCtrl Module and Channel properties control when and how the sensor is powered Power to the sensor can either be switched or constant The following table describes connections and behavior for the different values of PwrCtrl PwrCtrl Connections and Behavior AIO SW12 Connect sensor V to the SWBATT terminal of a connected AIO module Set the Module property to the number of the connec
275. rties 77 82 sensor blocks See sensor blocks telemetry blocks See telemetry blocks wiring 85 Bool 201 BP block 142 Bridge Resistance block 148 Burst 52 Burst Int 52 calibrate sensors XPert 60 touchscreen 128 CapRain block 149 Center in Window 49 channel binary input 144 random 52 self timed 49 cleaning 130 clearing log 66 Com ports configuring 23 28 COM ports pin assignments 121 23 testing 28 Communication Test Menu 28 Coms Tag block 235 COMx 281 connection settings in XTerm 109 Constant block 151 ConstIn block 151 contrast 18 adjusting from Login screen 9 129 adjusting from Main tab 20 129 control blocks See Also blocks Binary Out 244 Pulse Out 245 Control Panel tab 22 59 count 199 205 Counter block 153 Counts per Turn drop down box 179 CS107 Temperature sensor block 155 CS505 Fuel Moisture sensor block 159 current measurement 136 140 D data column log file 65 data modem See modems data modem date column log file 66 setting 19 Day buttons 66 Deleting a Block 87 Deleting Multiple Blocks 87 Dew point block 202 Dial In Commands 30 Dial Out Commands 30 Digital I O Module 268 counters 269 digital filters 269 features 268 frequency 269 inputs 269 outputs 270 plug assignments 268 shaft encoders 269 specifications 268 direct connect 23 29 Display block 247 DLLs 3 overview 3 DoubleVolts 139 E enable excitation channe
276. ru to access a port already under control of Remote then the existing port settings are always used This includes hardware handshaking If you try to communicate with a port with hardware handshaking enabled and CTS is low preventing transmission then the message CTS LOW is displayed Pressing ESC twice followed by a will show the status of the control lines H high L Low pressing again any number of times will update the current status of those lines pressing any other key will stop checking the status of the lines and return to passthru mode RD dir Remove a directory REBOOT Reboots the Xpert RECORDING onloff The RECORDING command will display the current recording status If on is specified then recording is turned on likewise off will turn recording off RELEASE adapter Releases DHCP leases on network adapters or the specific adapter if specified The adapter index can be retrieved and the current lease viewed with the IPCONFIG ALL 285 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com command DHCP leases are usually managed automatically but this command can be used to verify that a connected router is assigning IP addresses reliably REN old new Rename a file RENEW adapter Renews DHCP leases on network adapters or the specific adapter if specified The adapter index can
277. rval fields despite the 242 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com value of num values This allows the timestamp of the incoming data to be determined at runtime and for it to be formatted with an accurate offset field 243 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com OUTPUT BLOCKS Binary Out BinOut Inputs BinIn Outputs BinOut Description This block is used to control one Digital I O Module channel s output switch The switch is either activated on or inactive off When activated the switch connects 100 ohms between the channel I O pin and ground To configure the block select the module number the channel number and whether or not the output logic should be inverted The reset power up state of the digital I O module is that all the output switches are off The output switch will also turn off anytime that recording is turned off Note Do not use channel or channel 8 for an output For more on how Digital I O Module channels can be used as outputs see the Appendix C I O Modules Non inverted Output States are Binary 1 switch on ground Binary 0 switch off Pull up to internal V depends on channel see appendix for detailed specs Binary Output Properties Digital 1 0 Module F f Channel 3 7 Cancel I
278. ry for the file to be Temp To do this press the button labeled Up and then select Temp If you were to select flash disk as the destination directory you could fill the flash disk with the new file and shut down the system If the Xpert contains a storage card USB or SD then when the button labeled UP is pressed you will be able to select one of USB Card or SD Card as a destination When you press the Export button the following dialog is displayed Format Comma Delimited This dialog allows you to define what the exported log file should look like The Format options are Comma delimited Tab delimited and Fixed Column The comma delimited format works well with spreadsheets The Tab Delimited and Fixed Column formats can work well when printing The Download options are defined as follows Since last export When this option is selected the system exports only data that is more than the time of the last log export If the log has never been exported the system exports the entire log Start time to end When this option is selected the system exports only the data time that has a timestamp between the dates and times specified in Start Time and End Time Start time toendlog When this option is selected the system exports only the data that has a timestamp between the time specified in Start Time and the end of the log Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World
279. s Redirector Settings The Redirector button will display the Redirector Connection Settings screen containing options for connecting to a station hosted on the Sutron Redirector service x User Name Password Server Settings uef Port ars IV Use defaults Cancel Below is a description of each option User Name The name you were assigned to access the Sutron Redirector service Password The password you were assigned to access the Sutron Redirector service URL The IP address or URL of a custom Redirector service Port The port number of a custom Redirector service 103 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Use defaults Check this if you wish to specify custom values for the Redirector service URL or port number otherwise the settings for the Sutron Redirector service will be used Troubleshooting If you are unable to access the Redirector service check to make sure your user name and password were specified correctly If that doesn t resolve the issue check with your network administrator that you have rights to access redirector sutron com on port 80 If your organization blocks non Web access on port 80 you may also try specifying the URL redirector sutron com and port 23 under Server Settings Preparing the Xpert to work with XTerm The Xpert comes configured at the factory to communicate with
280. s Fuel Moisture FM Wiring Connect the FM signal to the selected input on the digital module CH1 Connect the FM enable to the selected input on the digital module CH2 Connect the GND to GND Connect the FM Power to VBAT Note the digital module must have special code part number 8080 0006 1 Description This block measures a CS505 Fuel Moisture sensor The sensor has an output frequency in the range of 600 to 1500 Hz A special version of the digital module 8080 0006 1 is needed to read these higher frequencies The sensor also has a separate enable line to turn on and off the sensor as needed to make a measurement The equation used to convert the frequency to fuel moisture percent is as follows PP 1 Freq 1000 FM CO C1 PP C2 PP PP CO 220 14 C1 365 89 C2 114 96 Fuel Moisture Properties Digital 1 0 Module f Channel F x Cancel Enable Channel 2 v 159 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com GetTag Inputs Outputs Data Description This block gets the requested data from another station using Sutron Standard Protocol SSP communications The properties for the block specify the port to use for the communications and the path or station name The port can be specified only if you have first set up ports in the Coms SSP CL entry on the Setup tab The path can be a simple stati
281. s a special version of the Average block that includes computations to make a vector average The vector average is important to any sensor that has a circular discontinuity such as a wind sensor with the crossover from 0 to 359 degrees This block is in fact geared toward wind sensors but could be used any time performing a vector average is desired Like the Average block Vector Average itself requests samples from a sensor and thus does not require a Measure block to be used before it Vector Average has the same properties window as the Average block See the description of Average for an explanation of the different fields 219 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Average Properties Schedule Time Cancel ul Interval Sample Interval foo 00 01 Duration loo 01 00 ggio Vector Average has a large number of special outputs corresponding to all the vector computations it makes To perform most of its computations the Vector Average block requires signals on both its Speed and Dir ection inputs These inputs correspond in a general sense to magnitude and angle with the angle always specified in degrees 220 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Wave Processor WavProc Input Input SDI 12 output from Sutron R
282. s button causes contents of the log file to be erased The system will ask for confirmation before doing this Note that this erases the contents of the log file but does deleting the log file itself this can only be done under the Setup tab Data will continue to be stored to a cleared log file if logging to that file is active as defined in the in the Setup Entering a NOTE To enter a note into the log first select the log where the note should be placed typically the system log as most users don t want notes in their data logs press the NOTE button and enter the text to be added Then press OK in the upper right corner to enter the note or press X to cancel entering a note This is a useful way to document site visits or to note any issues found while on a site visit Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Export This button is used to retrieve the log file Clicking this button will cause the system to lead you through the steps to create an ASCII file of the data in the log The log file is a compressed file If you were to try to view the file you would see gibberish because of the compression Converting the file to ASCII allows the contents of the file to be viewed As a part of this Export process you are asked to specify a destination for the file If you do not get a prompt to save the file on the PC you should change the directo
283. s frequency inputs with programmable alarm count leading edge trailing edge or both edges of input pulse Up to four quadrature shaft encoder inputs requires two inputs per sensor with programmable alarm Two switchable threshold inputs compatible with R M Young wind sensor e Switched sensor power e Industrial temperature range operation 40 to 60 C Inputs Inputs saan Interval microseconds Output open drain MOS switches Pull up voltage 0 14 Volts Resistance 80 125 Q Current 70 mA SW BAT output Protection Static discharge 2000 Volts Lightning Conducted 400 Volts CMOS levels Human body model 31 microsecond rise 1 millisecond fall Viewing the card from the front the plug assignments are as shown below The I O lines are numbered 1 8 LSB is 1 268 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com xH BAT G Ground Input Only Switchable sensitivity Inputs When programmed as an input each line can act as a digitally filtered counter clock or a shaft encoder input Shaft encoders require two input lines hence users can have up to four shaft encoders eight counters or a combination of the two When a run command is received sampling of the inputs starts Digital filters The inputs can be low pass filtered before being applie
284. s from an unsupported sensor For example say there is a humidity sensor that outputs 0 5 to 2 5 volts for O to 100 relative humidity different from the output of any sensors supported by the AT RH sensor block The following equation could be determined y 50x 25 which would convert the sensor voltage to a relative humidity value ranging from 0 to 100 that could be logged or transmitted To implement this in a Polynomial block the 25 would be entered next to kO for the 0 order of the equation and the 50 entered next to k for the 1 order Fields k2 through k5 would be left at zero since we are only implementing a first order equation A general purpose VoltMeter or ADC sensor blocks would be used to input the sensor voltage into the system in this case 213 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PtCtrl Point Control Inputs Point Enable 1 Enable 2 Outputs Move Move Stop Status Description The Point Control block is used to control the position of some device using a feedback control loop The current position of the device is wired to the input Point When the position of the device differs more than a user defined amount the outputs are set to attempt to bring the position of the device back to the desired point Point Control Properties Offset 1100 00 00 Interval 00 05 00 ae Cancel Pul
285. s measurement Available voltages are the integer values between 5 and 5 V 3 Human body model 4 One microsecond rise one milli second fall gt Channel 1 Differential over 4 8 to 4 8 Vin 261 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Operational States The ADC has two operational states running and stopped which are controlled by commands to the device Running In this state the input lines are sampled and processed This state consumes more power than the stopped state so the ADC card should be left running only if necessary The digital output line may be pulsed using the pulse command The ADC executes a reset sequence when it receives the run command When the reset is complete a message is sent to the host Stopped In this state the device is idle It will accept commands and the output SwGnd will reflect the last command that set this output to either open 1 or switched to ground 0 The input lines are not sampled Pulse commands will be ignored in this state Inputs Outputs Inputs The ADC has six single ended analog inputs which may be paired to form differential inputs Outputs The ADC provides One 12 volt output Bat One switched 12 volt output SwBat One output that can be switched to ground SwGnd Six excitation channels analog outputs that can be programmed from 5V to 5V and One output
286. s to knowing when and how to update its display However the nature of serial communications sometimes causes screen updates to lag slightly or become garbled As an example log in to the Xpert and select the different tabs of the Xpert display Notice that it takes time for the Xpert to switch from on tab to another If you are connected at a baud rate slower than 115 200 the wait for the display to update can be long If you select a control and don t see an immediate response wait a bit and try again Do not click controls rapidly as this will very likely translate into undesired behavior When using the desktop version of XTerm you can use the desktop s keyboard as if it were connected to the Xpert For example instead of using the Xpert s virtual keypad shown below use your keyboard The characters typed are sent to the Xpert s keyboard buffer XTerm COM1 115200 x ox Xpert File Transfer Hele oag JA e i LJL Upgrade AL pg Status cars oa Space a esec Del MV Web Server IV Auto Update rc als elle zli EIGIZIC Ce E EE EIL LIE When exporting logs from Xpert using XTerm XTerm assumes you want to save the exported log on your local PC and so offers a Save As dialog on the local PC see below desktop PC 105 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com shown l
287. s to the GUI See chapter 6 for instructions on how to install and run XTerm LOGGING IN User Access After connecting with Xterm two choices of access are available Retrieval and Setup Each succeeding level provides all the privileges of the preceding level Therefore users logging in under Setup Access can retrieve data but users logging in under Retrieval Access cannot access the system setup Multiple usernames passwords accounts are allowed for these levels If no users are added for a particular level then that level can be entered without a password Select type of access for data retrieval Setup Access for station setup Logging into the unit causes a note to be sent to the system log recording the username and time of the login The user accounts are maintained on the Setup tab under Users Access to this tab is available to the Setup group only Press the Logout button on the Main tab to logout NOTE If using Xterm Logout does not close Xterm it just logs you out of the system The contrast setting for the Xpert display can be changed from the login dialog temperature extremes affect contrast considerably and can render the display unreadable without adjustment Invisible buttons exist in the upper and lower right corners of the screen Each button is about an inch or so square Pressing the upper right button increases the contrast setting while pressing the lower right button decreases the contr
288. scription The SoilTemp block is used to measure soil temperature sensors The following dialog is used to configure the block for measurement Model LI COR 7900 180 7 J E AIO Module 1 7 Cancel AIO Channel 7 Units OF c Select the type of soil temperature sensor in Model and specify the analog I O module and channel in AIO Module and AIO Channel Select the Units for the output Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com fag Solar Radiation SolRad Inputs lt none gt Outputs SolRad Wiring Connect the sensor output to the selected channel on the analog module CH1 CH6 Connect the sensor ground to GND Description This block supports all the solar radiation sensor sold by Sutron part numbers 5600 0600 0601 0602 0603 and 0605 All of these utilize one channel analog input on an Analog I O module Select the sensor part number and the units for the block to output in The Calibration is used in the equation Solar Radiation mv calibration The units for Calibration are typically millivolts per watt per meter squared The sensor manufacturer typically supplies the value for calibration If the units supplied by the manufacturer are in a different format convert them prior to entering the calibration value Specify in Warmup ms the number of milliseconds the I O module should
289. se Time 00 00 05 000 Set Point 10 Deadband 10 Invert outputs Latched outputs w The control loop executes on a schedule set by the user The Offset and Interval properties determine when and how often respectively the loop executes Each is specified in seconds relative to a 24 hour clock Both enable inputs must be true for the control loop to execute When Enable 1 is false the control loop skips execution and may execute at the next scheduled interval However when Enable 2 is false the control loop will no longer be scheduled until recording is restarted regardless of its subsequent states Also when Enable 2 is false the Status output is set to false it is set to true at all other times 214 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The user sets the desired device position by setting the Set Point property The Deadband property defines the range of points that are considered to be within tolerance Specifically an input Point is in within tolerance i e no attempt to reposition is made when the difference between Set Point and input Point is less than or equal to Deadband Moves are accomplished by setting the Move Move and Stop outputs These are boolean outputs typically wired to BinOut blocks in order to set the state of some hardware control line When Latched Outputs is checked the selected move lin
290. sesiethscesvn eor i AEE E E EEE E EEE EEE esti pene ea o EEES 100 Automatic Detection of Xperts on a NetWork esseseessseesesreesesrerrestsrentesteetsserrenestestrstentssreresrestestesreetsseeersree 102 SSP Setm GS o era T E Tr o Op E rE EE TE EE E EE EET a ener ESE 102 Redirector Settings sree eoet onseaedtessadbes otea E rE on eE SEDERE Ee TE ES Eeo rE E TEA er PER TE Eee onp E Sie 103 Preparing the Xpert to work with XTerm 00 eee ee eee cee esse cece cseecseeeseeeeeeseesseeesecesecsecsaecsaecsaecsaecaaeeneseneseeeees 104 Operating X Tercer an renere EAE seus stsekh yee le capeseceeaseaes TE EEEE Ero STRT Er EREET r OE E SSS 104 Fil Transfer arkier r bs oe a E EA E EEE E EE EEEa EE E EO ETE ET R EEES 106 leiro e eraa TEA ETO Ca Ea P E E An EANA AE ET A A E T AT 107 SetiGlock a5 ste shot eae AE ERE EE E R E R RA 108 Connect niin Sas helene ea AA A ena E E Ae R Sa vos Site oe 109 Upsradestiiis cae rier ie iis A ee ee eS E Cae he See tee Jail se Le lab oe 109 WebServer i255 sesh sieves tecush shea scg deh bes ch teas ve cmsshSuncs soda ddan Seth cons cedaeaveracacuh iabuageh sees tessescassbeusa suk ascageh sett tens vonan 109 Configuring the PC modem for use With Xterm 0 0 0 eee cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeecesecsecsaecsaecsaecseecseeeaeseneeeeeees 111 Status and RX TX Xp Err indicators v 05 cesscvecsestuscssctecdusecesuevasegecncvesssevedsupsnacvocscevedsevsceesssovenensvaloseneeesunsonpereye 111 Special Command Li
291. sesrssresssressssrrrrsesreerestesresrersestrnesrenteseeersse 15 Redirecting SDI to COM9 on an 8080 0000 3B occ eeesesessceseescesceeceeecseeseescesceesecsessessessceaeeassessesseesesseeaeeaseaseeeatens 15 CHAPTER 3 OPERATING THE XPERT eeseseseeeeroroesesesceeeroroesesecoereroroesesocoerororseserceeesoroesesecoerosoroeseeeeoerororseseeeee 17 TEOGGING IN AE EE AEE de A A ENT 18 User ACCESS oieee ae a eae a a aa E A aas a E a a aa ea aaa E aea ATEA asn 18 Tab OVERVIEW nai leash e Ee ae iw a e a aa O Ea eE ra EE oo E V AE EREE OE 18 MAN TAB coina s e a 305 or EE E use eb eae a E oak o Missy E BG Er EO EVA O bh Ee AE SEE AEA locas 19 D te Time ss einai n a a e a aed E a a a a iae Ee A e Ea aE e 19 Staton Name serene ti ee e a e each O eh eae a E Adi a Ee E E Eae a E on A O Eae EAEE aS 20 Station Statuse inie e ea e e a a A Ea o a Eae a E S E E ERTEKE a 20 Contras Tesi cls iae E E E A E teed banks E E A AS 20 Battery Voltas einrnnrerii cavezoreduc es N S 21 DSO SOU EEA E E E E E E E E E ET 21 SETUP TAB on aeaee a a E a a S a E a E a S E E Ee E SE Naa 22 Trec OVELVICW 85 orean E T A A R A E E A N S Seles ES 22 Coms SSP CE cas sats ces i ieesseusse E R E E A S a E oh tendo Ge ssnuvtesthsed cate E S E E A R 23 COMS ASSP CL Setup Menu inenen a eiae aee a eaea e ea aaee aeiiao aeeiio aa aeaaee s aea 24 Comis Configuration Settings eesi arien iior E AE e KR A E A A ee nie eda Sees 28 EzSetup M as re MENiS E A EEEa ea rok ae aay 35 Measurement Schedtless
292. sing ESC 3 times The command prompt supports a 10 line command recall capability invoked by pressing UP ARROW to scroll back through old commands or DOWN ARROW to scroll to newer commands Most all commands support the Y MODEM ZIP and C options Unless stated otherwise the default filename for the output of a command will be station_command txt for a YMODEM transfer or station_command zip for a ZIP transfer When a command displays more than 24 lines of output the More prompt will be displayed The user may press space to display another 24 lines enter to display the next line or C to start displaying lines continuously without break The more mode of output may be re enabled at any time by pressing M Output may be terminated by pressing ESC The REPORT command defines message filters in Remote and in Xpert Reporting requires extra processing that will slow operation of the unit The options can be combined For example to monitor COM2 for SSP messages watch I2C messages and observe debug messages try the command Flash Disk gt report SSP2 I2C Debug Reporting enabled and filter is set Here s a summary of what types of messages each option will display None or Off No messages SSP SSP messages from any communication port and error warning and status messages SSP messages are decoded SSP messages over TCP IP are not displayed SSPn SSP messages from th
293. sion into flash disk and run it instead of the version in windows Remote can support different communications devices on each of its serial ports All the ports are specified by the command line arguments when remote exe is run Remote supports the following communications devices Name Device H W Flow Description COMx Direct RTS CTS The Xpert is connected to a PC using a connection to RS232 cable Typically the PC will run aPC XTerm PCBASE2 or XCONNECT Both a command prompt and SSP are available MODEM Commercial RTS CTS The Xpert is connected to a Hayes modem compatible telephone modem No voice functions will be supported RADIOx LOS Radio None The Xpert is connected to a LOS radio modem modem The Xpert can communicate with other stations and master stations on the radio network using SSP VOICEx Sutron RTS CTS The Xpert is connected to Sutron s Voice Voice Modem Modem Both Voice and Data functions will be supported SSPx SSP only None The Xpert is connected to a Xpert a Base direct Station PC or another RTU that supports connection SSP using an RS232 cable Typically the PC will run XTerm PCBASE2 or XCONNECT RSx RS 485 None The Xpert is directly connected to another connection Xpert using SSP Where x is the COM port number to 4 H W Flow control was enabled on SSP ports before version 2 3 and may be re enabled if needed with the HS option Remote also s
294. sor the ComsTag block must be placed after the sensor block but before any active blocks e Display block In order for the Display block to enable front panel calibration for a sensor block the Display block must be connected directly to the sensor block e Any passive non active block with more than 1 input e g XY Funct and Bool blocks in order to ensure this kind of block operates on data measured in the same frame and to avoid certain side effects that come from active blocks executing along split paths that rejoin like logging twice place the measure block AFTER the block having the multiple inputs See Appendix A for constraints of other blocks Block Properties We now know a lot about what is happening with our example setup but not everything We don t yet know for example the units the barometric pressure setup is going to return its data in or how often the solar radiation is going to be sampled or what log file either data stream will be saved to For this information we need to look at block properties To view the property window for a block click the icon for the block once and then select Edit Properties from the menu that appears Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Arel Dg wire Add gt Exit Select Output gt Clear selection Delete Delete Right If we do this for the BP sensor blo
295. sor Name HGAvg Precision right digits 2 H Log scheduled time From the Log Name drop down menu select the log file the data is to be stored to If the log you wish to use does not yet exist select the New Log option from the drop down list and the system will allow you to create a new log Sensor Name should be set such that it describes the source of the data This name shows up in the Sensor column of the Log tab and is the only way to identity for example whether a temperature data point originated from an AT RH AirTemp BP block Precision defines the number of places to the right of the decimal point that should be stored in the log Blocks connected to the output of the log block will get a passed through version of the data stream seen at the block input except with the precision applied Log scheduled time determines the source of the timestamp that is given to the logged data When checked the data is timestamped with the time the data was scheduled to be measured When not checked the time the data is actually finally computed is used This value may be 227 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com several seconds after the scheduled time depending on how long it takes to measure and calculate the final value Logging with actual time instead of scheduled time can be useful when logging min and max values prod
296. ssing tabs missing menu items etc it is possible the unit detected an incorrect version of dll sll and did not load it If this happens a warning message is shown on boot up and a warning message will be placed into the system log indicating what version was found and what is expected If this happens simply copy the correct version of dll sll onto the flash disk and re boot the unit 128 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Xterm has a White screen or Black Screen When using Xterm to talk with a Xpert if the screen area does not show the login prompt or menus Black screen This indicates the unit is not communicating Check that the unit has power and that the serial cable is connected Also check that the correct com port and baud rates have been selected White screen This indicates that Xterm is communicating with the Xpert but no program is running First try right clicking into the screen area to ensure the screen is updated Check that the unit has an autoexec bat by using file transfer if it doesn t send one to the unit either create one following APPENDIX F or get it from the web site and reboot it If it does have one transfer it to the pc and edit it to make sure it has the line Flash Disk Xpert exe in it If the unit has the autoexec bat and it has the line to run the xpert exe in it then close xterm run a terminal program
297. ssions have been disabled OFF then pressing the Clear button will re enable them Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status Basic a Coms SSP CL RADIOS E E2Setup Measurements Graphical Setup I O Modules LAN Settings Log files Satlink iy Edit E E Fl COMS SSP CL Setup Menu The Setup tab is used to assign the various devices to a port This is done by clicking Coms SSP CL and pressing Edit This brings up the Com Port Setup Menu as follows Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SSP CL Setup Direct y 115200 v v 115200 7 None 7 115200 7 voice v 115200 7 v v Cancel Setup TCPIP None None 115200 None 115200 None y 115200 7 None y 11520 7 PCBASE Eel Test Master Ka K K KKKA The ports and baud rate you wish to use are selected from this menu Each port can be configured as None Direct Radio Modem Voice SSP or RS 485 if RS 485 option is installed Checking the checkbox next to each port will tell the Xlite to enhance and manage the port above and beyond what Remote alone does This includes sending out alarms on the port as well as handling speech dial in and dial out and support for SSP blocks which can be used to send and retrieve tags or set the time Typ
298. surement schedule select the New Measurement entry and press the Edit button To edit an existing measurement select the entry in the tree and click Edit To delete a measurement schedule select the entry and click Delete When creating or editing a measurement schedule the following dialog is shown x Measurement Schedule Measurement Interval 00 15 00 Measurement Time 00 00 00 Sampling Interval 00 00 01 Samples to Average 60 Measurements per Log j1 V Enable Log ID nt Cancel Differences from an 8210 Editing an EzSetup measurement is very much like the measurement schedules on the 8210 with a few differences The 8210 has two fields named Power Time and Sampling Time which are not supported and the order of processing has also been changed a little Specifically on the Xpert all the non averaged sensors are measured first so these measurements occur as close as possible to the measurement time Then averaging starts immediately following and continues until either the Samples to Average is exceeded or the average time has expired The average time expires when the next scheduled Measurement Interval is to start or the sampling window defined by the Sampling Interval and Samples to Average is exceeded MEASUREMENT INTERVAL Specifies how often the measurement is performed MEASUREMENT TIME Specifies when the measurement is performed This is can be viewed as an offset
299. t a PC running a terminal program to COM and apply power to the unit After the terminal displays Flushing caches press CTRL key and C lt CTRL C gt hold until message displays Bypassing flash disk Autoexec bat The factory default for autoexec bat is as follows windows remote exe coml 115200 windows Xpert exe The first line runs remote exe enabling communications on com The second line runs the main Xpert application program The details of running remote exe are explained in the following section Xpert exe accepts several command line options Debug send debug messages to the serial port SDI COM4 use COM4 for SDI 12 NOTE If redirecting SDI to a different com port the com port settings in the Coms SSP CL section of setup should be left as None Coms SSP CL is strictly for configuring SSP and Command Line communication devices e g Modem Voice Modem Radio etc You may make changes to the autoexec bat by editing the file on your PC and then transferring it to the Xpert However if you make a mistake and render it inoperable you will need to follow the instructions to skip autoexec bat on startup so you can transfer a correct autoexec bat to the Xpert 280 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com REMOTE EXE The system has a remote exe in the windows directory However it is possible to load an updated ver
300. t radiation sensors the Kipp amp Zonen NR Lite 2 CNR 2 and CNR 4 Each sensor differs in the components of radiation measured 171 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The NR Lite 2 is a high output thermopile sensor that measures the sum of incoming and outgoing all wave radiation i e both short wave and long wave radiation This sum is output via the NetRad block output The other block outputs ShortRad LongRad etc are ignored The CNR 2 also measures and outputs net total radiation in NetRad but also measures and outputs net short wave radiation in ShortRad and net long wave radiation in LongRad The CNR 4 also measures and outputs net total radiation in NetRad net short wave radiation from above in ShortRadUp net short wave reflected radiation from below in ShortRadDown net long wave radiation from above in LongRadUp and net reflected long wave radiation from below in LongRadDown The following dialog is used to configure the sensor measurement Model CNR 4 vit AIO Module f 7 Cancel Differential V Temp Component Upper Pyrano Heater AIO Channel 1 7 vent Sensitivity fa e Model Select the Model you wish to measure AIO Module select the analog module to which you connected the sensor Differential check this box to measure the sensor input s differentially Com
301. t specifies the options you have selected will be placed on the Windows desktop Many shortcuts to XTerm may be created each with a different com port or configuration Once the shortcut has this additional information XTerm will not display the communications configuration screen when it starts Automatic Detection of Xperts on a Network When connecting to a networked Xpert using the TCP IP or Telnet options a Detect button will appear next to the URL box Pressing the Detect button will display a list of Xpert stations and various information including IP address version number of Remote exe model and serial number Selecting a station and pressing OK will copy that station s IP address in to the URL box If Xterm is unable to detect a station it may be because an exception has not been created for Xterm in Windows Firewall requires access to UDP port 52733 or perhaps because the Xpert is running firmware older than 3 2 before this feature was introduced The Detect button may also be used in conjunction with the Redirector option to list the stations you own that are hosted by the Sutron Redirector service SSP Settings The Setup button will display the SSP Settings screen containing advanced options for controlling the timing of SSP messages XTerm is optimized for a 115 2K baud direct connection and other settings are often necessary for slower or less reliable connections Carrier Delay sec fl Presets 115 2k Default
302. ta Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SHUTDOWN Command Example Flash Disk gt SHUTDOWN Stopping The Xpert application has been shutdown STARTUP Command Example Flash Disk gt STARTUP Xpert has been started STATION Command Example Flash Disk gt STATION sitel23 The station is named sitel23 STATUS Command Example Flash Disk gt STATUS COM1 115200 3 0 3 10 0 1 0 bob 1 is logged in Cmd Flash Disk gt status SSP STATS RX 959 TOTAL 959 BAD 0 TX 574 BAD 0 FAIL 0 RADIO2 9600 10 0 3 30 0 0 1 Unknown 0 is logged out Cmd SSP STATS RX 2027 TOTAL 2027 BAD 0 TX 1996 BAD 0 FAIL 0 VOICE3 115200 3 0 3 10 0 1 0 Unknown 0 is logged out Cmd UPGRADE Command Example Flash Disk gt UPGRADE Are you sure Yes Stopping The Xpert application has been shutdown Ready to receive YModem file s press ESC to abort ymodem send the new file or files in a zip archive Upgrade complete Restarting Xpert YMODEM Command Example The following sends a file from your PC and place it on the Xpert using the Ymodem protocol Flash Disk gt YMODEM Ready to receive YModem file s press ESC to abort The following gets the files PUMP BAS and FLUME BAS from the Xpert and transfer them to your PC using the Ymodem protocol Flash Disk gt YMODEM PUMP BAS FLUME BAS Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to a
303. tagged by a ComsTag block The name of the tag must appear in the Rel max val field of the properties dialog If no tag appears in this field or if the name is invalid then RMax Val is output as 0 This block is commonly placed after a Measure block that is sampling a sensor on a schedule or directly after a sensor block setup in Event mode The Start Time is an offset time For example if the start time below was set to 00 05 00 a measurement would happen at 20 00 35 00 50 00 05 00 etc MinMax Properties Start Time 00 00 00 Interval 00 15 00 Rel max val fwoIR EOE Cancel 211 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Moving Average MovingAverage Inputs Input Outputs Average STD Description This block computes a moving average for the input value with each new sample This differs from the normal Average block that computes the average only at the end of the scheduled interval It can be used to compute an average speed over a two minute window with the average being updated every second The screen that follows shows a 10 minute average with the samples being collected every 30 seconds and output of the average every 30 seconds When the block runs the output data will be flagged as bad until 1 2 of the required number of samples have been collected The checkbox labeled circular input can be
304. ted module DIO SW12 Connect sensor V to the SWBATT terminal of a connected DIO module Set the Module property to the number of the connected module DIO CHAN This option is used when connecting sensor power to an external relay controlled by an Xpert digital output channel Connect sensor V to the power supply terminal of the relay Connect the relay control signal to the DIO module output channel Set the Module property to the number of the DIO module Set Channel to the number of the output channel controlling the relay PROT 12 Connect sensor V to a connector that provides constant 12V Warmup s The PB200 200WX takes several seconds following power on before valid data is produced The Warmup property is used to define how long to wait before attempting to read data from the 175 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com sensor after it is first powered on Increase this value until the Xpert no longer consistently logs this sensor s data with BAD quality following sensor power on Note this property is ignored when PwrCtrl is set to PROT 12 Special note for averaging the Average and VecAvg blocks require at least 50 of the incoming samples to be of good quality in order for the averaged values to be set to good quality Hence either the average block s sampling duration must be over twice the warmup time or the inactivity t
305. ter or ADC Resistance ADC Frequency output Counter or Frequency SDI 12 output SDI 12 RS 232 RS485 output RS232 GPRS232 sll or Basic Sensor See Appendix A for a listing of all the different types of blocks available in the system The most common measurement type is an analog measurement 1 e either a voltage or resistance Many analog sensors simply specify a 5 V excitation voltage and provide a slope and offset The ADC block provides all the properties needed to make this measurement For the most accurate analog reading use the ADC block s Double Volts option and multiply the given slope by 5 Double Volts will always return a ratio of REF reading meaning it will return a value between 0 and 1 since the slope for a 5 REF assumes an output of 0 5 Multiplying the given slope by 5 will return the correctly scaled value Using Double Volts will Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com require 2 analog channels If the system is running low on analog inputs the Voltage reading could be used if you multiply the given slope by 2 since Vref is 2 5 What if you don t see a block that appears to do what you need Starting with version 2 2 the Xpert supports Xpert Basic a programming language with which you can write your own blocks and other custom processing Refer to the Xpert Basic Users Manual for more details SDI 12 Sensors o
306. the Duration Count Outputs the number of samples that were used to compute the average Description The Average block is like a Measure block that can perform some common data processing functions related to averaging The block can output the average mean maximum minimum standard deviation or sample count number of samples from a series of data points sampled from a sensor The Schedule Interval indicates how often the Average block should sample a series of data points process them and output a value The Schedule Time specifies the synchronization of when this should begin The Sample Interval entry indicates how often the sensor should be sampled each time its scheduled to sample and the Sample Duration specifies for how long To average continuously the Schedule Interval should be set equal to the Sample Duration Note Sample Interval may be set to milliseconds for sub second sampling For example the value 00 00 00 500 would cause sampling to occur every 500 milliseconds When specifying milliseconds you must specify all three digits Average Properties Schedule Time 00 05 00 Interval 00 30 00 Sample Cancel Interval Duration The example above shows an Average block that will perform it s averaging every 30 minutes starting at an offset of 5 minutes from the hour When averaging starts samples will be taken every 2 seconds for a duration of 1 minute At the time of the
307. the I O Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com module number can be changed This number is stored into the flash of the I O module so it remembers it on power cycles Serial No 23 I2C Address Cancel 1 0 Mod No fa Lia Type String ANALOG IO 1232 00V1 07051203 IO Module List 011902 0x04 011904 0x06 011901 0x08 011900 Ox04 Close NOTE All I O Module Names must be unique see above screen shot If not unique change the module number as described in the Naming I O Modules section below Naming I O Modules An I O module name consists of a three character descriptor indicating module type that cannot be changed plus a unique module number The number of the module can be changed The system utilizes the more descriptive modules names AIO1 Analog I O Module 1 AIO2 Analog I O Module 2 to differentiate between modules when setting up measurements rather than having to specify serial numbers The generic and user changeable naming of the modules also simplifies the process of changing one module for another The system must not have more than one type of module with the same number I E If a system has two analog modules both modules cannot be module number one but it is possible to have a digital module one and an analog module one Reseting I O Modules Pressing Reset will reboot the I2C bus
308. tion Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Sensor Name Unknown fa P K Cancel At the top of this properties window is a drop down menu with all the log files that have been created in the system as well as an option that when selected allows you to create a new log file This drop down box identifies the log to which this setup block will store data The default Sensor Name can be changed to more easily identify the source of data in the log this name is used in the Log tab as well as in imported data files Changing this label is especially important in cases where there are more than one of the same types of sensor The Precision indicates to what precision the data wind speed in our example will be logged The value specified should be less than or equal to the sensor s actual precision Changing the properties of the other measure block and log block in our setup for sampling and logging wind direction would be done similarly Full descriptions of purposes and settings for each setup block can be found in Appendix A Setup Blocks Changing the Block Label The label displayed underneath the block in the setup diagram can be changed by selecting Rename from the pop up menu that appears after clicking the setup block Use this to help identify specific blocks in the setup F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Select Input Select Output gt Clear selection Delete Delete Right Rename
309. tion Wind direction requires connection to Digital Module input channel The units for wind speed can be set to mph mps kph ftps or knots RM Young Properties Direction AIO Module tT Input Chan F 7 Excit Chan 2 7 Speed Units MPH v DIO Module F 7 Channel 1 7 o Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SDI 12 Inputs lt none gt Outputs Output 0 Output 19 Wiring All SDI 12 sensors wire to GND 12 and Data on the Xpert Multiple wires can be connected to the same connections Description This general purpose sensor block is used to obtain data from a SDI 12 sensor parameters 1 through 20 to retrieve a parameter above 20 please use the Xpert Basic SDICollect function Select the SDI 12 address of the sensor the measurement command type and the units to report with the reading The C concurrent measurement command is only supported by SDI sensors versions 1 3 and higher NOTE The only supported commands are V M MC M1 M9 C CC C1 C9 RO R9 RCO RC9 To get other types of measurements a basic program using the SDI function must be used SdiCollect does not work so data must be parsed by the program The block scales the outputs according to the values of S ope and Offset using the equation output reading slope offset The user can change t
310. to DTR Configure Xpert for 12 on pin 9 of the DB9 Gill sensor must be set up as follows M4 U3 O1 L1 P2 B3 Fl H1 HQ El T1 S3 Cl Description This block supports the Gill WindSonic ultrasonic wind sensor This sensor has an RS232 serial output that can connect to one of the serial ports The WindSonic has its own configuration and setup The user must make sure the WindObserverlI is setup to operate with the Xpert before connecting it as it will not alter the setup of the sensor In setting up the sensor the user can choose the output units heater control and node address etc The user must set the sensor block s node address property to the same address as the sensor The user must set the sensor as follows see the Gill manual for further details Establish a connection from the sensor to a PC and turn on power to the sensor Enter configuration mode by sending if the sensor is in continuous output mode or sending lt node gt if the sensor is in polling mode Send D3 lt CR gt to display the current configuration Set the sensors to the following parameters the manual explains how to do this WindSonic M4 01 L1 P1 B3 F1 H2 E1 161 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Set the units as desired with U the heating with H and the node address with N Send Q lt CR gt Q is for Quit when finished The setup of
311. to create the same directory structure on the storage card as exists in the unzipped archive iii Copy the contents of each unzipped archive directory to the corresponding storage card directory b Alternatively if you do not want to use a storage card and you have at least 10MB available on the Xpert flash disk you may choose to copy the unzipped archive to the Flash Disk You ll need to create the directory structure first using the command line interface in this case as well 2 Insert the storage card into the Xpert skip this step if you chose option b above Select the Upgrade Kernel and or Application option from the Setup tab 4 The system will prompt you whether you want to upgrade using the upgrade found Verify the upgrade found is the one you intended and select Yes 5 Ifthe upgrade includes the kernel true when the upgrade provides the file Xpert2 ker in the root of the upgrade archive the system will prompt whether you wish to backup the registry Answer Yes 6 The upgrade will begin and finish automatically and may involve a reboot Customizing a Storage Card Upgrade Upgrading using an SD or USB file in the manner described above uses an upgrade script file text having upg extension that is very similar to the one used when upgrading serially The following commands are supported p set default source directory d delete the specified file s send the specified file m make
312. tron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Directly after the measure is the MIN MAX block This block also has a schedule that tells the system how often it should compute minimums and maximums every 24 hours starting at midnight in this example The rest of the blocks are wired to the output of the MIN MAX block The values are displayed on the LCD and logged The only output not wired is the COUNT output this output tells the number of samples used for calculations and was not needed for this setup Notice the blocks have been renamed renaming the blocks will help in maintaining the setup by making it easier to read In this example no satellite transmissions have been defined Adding transmission parameters is easy Simply select the output data to transmit by selecting a point typically a log block and selecting its output Then add a self timed parameter or random trigger block as needed Unlike the EZSetup every block in the Graphical setup must have the parameters defined separately EZSetup will pass through many of the parameters from one screen to another because all data is maintained and entered in a specific order In the Graphical setup the order of the blocks is not known and in some cases one output may go to several other blocks For example in the EZSetup the label of the sensor is passed into the display parameters for the label of the LCD In the graphical setup the label level would not mak
313. troubleshooting section for help to diagnose the problem Verify Touchscreen and Display Work To verify the touchscreen and display work press the Setup Access button on the login screen Then press the button labeled next to the station name Use the stylus enter a name for the station and press OK If the Xpert does not respond properly to the stylus the touchscreen may need calibration Refer to the troubleshooting section for help to recalibrate the touchscreen Verify XTerm Works XTerm is a program that connects your PC to the Xpert Using XTerm you will be able to setup and test an Xpert or Xpert without display See Chapter 6 for the details on how to install and run XTerm Verify I O Modules Work If you purchased separate I O modules with the Xpert connect the I O modules together and then using a 9 pin cable connect them to the I C port on the Xpert You can connect the cable to either side of the I O modules Once the modules have been connected use the stylus or PC mouse if using XTerm to select the tab labeled Setup If you don t see it as one of the tabs use the scroll buttons to the right of the tabs to bring it into view Now press the in front of the I O Module branch You will now see a list of the modules you have connected to the system If any have the same name then the module number will have to be changed in order to differentiate them Changing the module number is described in the Nami
314. ts field on the property page to the desired value When Reset Count is checked the count resets every time recording is started If the counter has been calibrated it will reset to the calibrated value otherwise it will reset to zero If more than one counter block or tipping bucket block is used on the same input channel all blocks would be reset to zero The Counter block supports calibration from the Sensors tab For the calibration the user will enter the current value for the counter The system will then compute a special calibration offset that is applied to the counter Anytime recording is stopped and restarted the counter should be calibrated to a known state as any counts that have occurred during the time when recording was stopped have been missed 153 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Counter Properties Digital Mod p 7 Digital Chan 2 v Filter 5 Slope i Offset oC Units Hz Reset count V 154 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com fal CS107 Temperature Sensor CS107Temp Inputs lt none gt Outputs Temp Wiring Connect the Thermistor black wire to the selected signal channel of the analog module CH1 CHxx Connect a precision 100K 0 1 resistor between CHx above and the selected excitation channel
315. ty one stop bit Configure the sensor to output 0 00 if it loses signal For more information see the 8800 1146 MRL users manual Connect Power leads as configured below either to GND and SW D 12 for AIO sw or DIO sw or through a relay that is switching the battery and using the selected DIO channel for control Description The MRL700 is used for measuring distance and therefore level The properties dialog is used to specify configuration details required for proper operation Reference is used to specify the reference distance and is used to compute level Warmup is the number of seconds the unit should be powered on before taking a measurement A typical warmup value is 30 seconds this is the time the sensor needs to provide back reliable readings If the values are to be averaged make sure to set the average time to at least two times this warmup time I E For 30 seconds of warmup the sensor should be averaged for at least one minute Inactivity is the number of seconds the unit should remain powered on following a measurement This prevents the sensor from having to go through the warmup time for every reading LE If averaging every 5 seconds setting this inactivity timer to 10 seconds will keep power on between readings PwrCtl is used to specify how the sensor is to be powered on When set to DIO Sw DIO switched 12 is used to control power When set to AIO Sw AIO switched 12 is used to co
316. uced by the Average or MinMax blocks When logging these values with use scheduled time unchecked the timestamp of the data is the same as when the sample was taken that produced the min or max value as opposed to the time the average min and max values are finally computed 228 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com le LogField Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The LogField block works in tandem with the LogRec block to enable you to build a record of data from several fields to add to a log The LogField block defines the characteristics of one of the fields within the record The following shows the Log Field Properties dialog used to configure the Log Field block Log Field Properties Name F1 A Record ID Defaut 7 ll Sequence Qf i Right digits 2 A Format string lt name gt lt val gt lt qual gt 7 a cancer The Name property simply gives the field a name that can be included in the formatted output if desired The name isn t used for any other purpose The system creates a default name of Fx where x is an integer representing the number of fields created so far Typically you ll want to name the field something more relevant to its purpose e g Temp or Level etc Record ID identifies to which LogRec block this field belongs The drop d
317. uld sample a series of data points process them and output values The Schedule Time specifies the synchronization of when this should begin The Sample Interval entry indicates how often the sensor should be sampled each time its scheduled to sample and the Sample Duration specifies for how long To average continuously the Schedule Interval should be set equal to the Sample Duration 206 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ei Interpolate Interpolate Inputs InterIn Outputs InterOut Description The Interpolate block is used to apply a table lookup function to a data stream This is useful in instances when applying a polynomial function would be too difficult For values not in the entered table the output is interpolated from adjoining table entries based on the selected Method The outputted signal can be labeled with new units by clicking the Units button Interpolate Properties Data Edit File Method Linear Units Cancel To load edit or save the file to interpolate from click the Edit File button The following window will come up Interpolate Data File Cancel th K Save Clear All Remove Par Edit Par Insert Pair HE To start creating a new table use Insert Pair to enter pairs of values The values will automatically sort according to the valu
318. up Copy it to the PC so it can be used at other stations You may also need to create log files if you are creating your own setup You typically create log files from the Setup tab Note when you load a setup into the Xpert it will automatically create a log file for you if the setup calls for it View the setup to make sure it is the desired setup for the station If you are using a Satlink select the Setup tab press the in front of Satlink and do the following Select Satlink and press Edit Verify the transmission ID is correct Verify the com port is correct Select Satlink Self Timed Verify settings Select Satlink Random Verify settings Select Self Timed Test Verify the sample formatted message Select Status Verify that the status from Satlink is displayed Verify that the GPS is being received If you have a modem or other device connected to the Xpert you will need to configure the Coms SSP CL section of the Setup tab a Select Coms SSP CL from Control Panel tab press EDIT b Set appropriate com port to your device type I E Select MODEM on com 3 NOTE SATLINK is configured under Satlink section so if a Satlink were connected to com2 you would leave com2 as NONE in coms section c Select the in front of COMS label d Select appropriate com port and press EDIT e Configure the device NOTE Configure properties will automatically change based on settings from step b LE selecting com3 would sho
319. upports the following command line arguments Option Description F UnitID ID to respond to when receiving an SSP message note this can be omitted if the user has set the station name T MasterID ID to use in SSP message when sending an alarm 281 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com HSx Force hardware RTS CTS handshaking on on port x Use this to enable handshaking on a device mode which normally has it disabled i e RADIO or SSP HSx Force hardware RTS CTS handshaking off on port x Use this to disable handshaking on a device mode which normally has it enabled i e COM MODEM VOICE DTRx Force DTR to be enabled all the time on port x when used in conjunction with a port in SSP or COM modes In SSP mode DTR is asserted whenever data is transmitted and in COM mode DTR is asserted whenever a connection is made This switch has no effect on RADIO mode where DTR is used to key the transmitter or MODEM or VOICE mode where DTR is used to hangup the phone DTRx Force DTR to be disabled all the time on port x when used in conjunction with a port in SSP or COM modes AUTOLOGO Causes command prompt sessions to automatically login as the user name N AUTO with no password This can be used to limit access to the system or to allow a custom command parser full control of the sess
320. urrent accumulation This block is typically used as a part of a system to monitor and control a water sampler where blocks before the accumulator measure level and flow compute discharge and compute discharge time This block then accumulates the total flow and sets a trigger every time a selected amount of flow has been registered The total flow is reset to 0 at a user set schedule typically daily The trigger typically connects to a pulse output block Accum Properties Time 00 00 00 Interval 24 00 00 sa Cancel Threshold jo i Include negative values 7 Use the Time and Interval properties to set the schedule at which the block resets the accumulation Use the Threshold property to specify the value of accumulation that when reached is a signal to set the trigger output to 1 Check Include negative values to allow negative input values to be included in the accumulation When not checked negative input values are not included 198 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Average Average Inputs Input Outputs Average Computes the mean average of the samples taken during the Duration Min Outputs the minimum of the samples taken during the Duration Max Outputs the maximum of the samples taken during the Duration STD Computes the standard deviation of the samples taken during
321. utput simply connect a Sutron I O module in through the unit s IC port Need to add more sensors than one module will support Simply stack additional modules onto the first The Xpert supports a nearly unlimited number of analog and digital I O modules so running out of I O is never an issue DLLs The Key to Modularity The Xpert software is modular and utilizes Windows DLLs Dynamic Linked Libraries DLLs are additional software components that can be added to the system at any time without having to update the main software This makes adding a new feature to the Xpert that was not available when the unit was purchased easy simply download the new DLL from the Sutron web page and send it across to the Xpert This might be done for example to add support for a new sensor or to add some newly released communication capability to the unit Some customers can even create their own DLLs using Microsoft Visual C and a Software Development Kit SDK provided by Sutron 3 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Xpert data acquisition platform is based on a 32 bit microprocessor the Microsoft Windows CE operated system and a touch sensitive graphical display optional The Xpert comes in two models one with a touch screen and one without a touch screen Sensors are added to the system via the S
322. vel Wiring Wire the pair of quadrature outputs to digital channels 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 or 7 and 8 If counts are in the wrong direction either reverse wires or change the rotation setting in the properties Power the sensor off 12V and GND Description This block is used to collect data from an incremental quadrature shaft encoder through a Digital I O Module Up to four Quadrature shaft encoders may be set up on one module The signal lines from each encoder must hook up to adjacent I O module inputs starting with an odd numbered one i e 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 Select the module and channel pair number the encoder is hooked up to odd channel 3 5 or 7 Enter the wheel diameter the rotation direction that results in a positive increase to the output and the units for the block to output in The Counts per Turn drop down box allows you to select 100 256 400 and 800 counts per turn in order to support different shaft encoders The quadrature shaft encoder block contains a calibrate procedure The calibrate procedure is used to set the reading to a user set value This is important to do whenever the Xpert is restarted or maintenance is done on the sensor The calibration procedure is run from the Sensors tab Quadrature Shaft Encoder Properties DIO Module fi o Channel B T Cancel Wheel Circumference 1Foot Other Circumference fi B Counts per Turn 100 179 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time
323. ver RS 485 port on an 8080 0000 3B The 8080 0000 3B has the ability to use RS 485 for SDI 12 sensors that support SDI 12 over RS 485 interfaces which the 3B provides via the COM9 connector Differential SDI 12 is not a defined standard It is a low power modification of an RS 485 interface It overcomes the cable limitation of SDI 12 since transmitted data is not referenced to the power supply ground It does not utilize a power consuming DC termination resistor The data signaling rate and protocol conform to SDI 12 standards The specification can be obtained at http www sdi 12 org Four wires are needed to use the differential SDI 12 interface two for power and two for data Wire as follows SENSOR 8080 0000 3B GND COMS9 pin 5 12V in COM9 pin 9 with J4 configured for 12V RS 485 B COM9 pin 3 idles high RS 485 A COMS9 pin 2 idles low same polarity as SDI 12 data line NOTE Since this is not a defined standard the labeling of the data lines is also not standardized The A and B above reflect the naming utilized in the RS485 specification No harm will be caused by reversing the data lines but there will be no communication When no SDI 12 communication is occurring no device is driving the data lines but once the port has been opened for the initial communication the Xpert applies a slight bias current to maintain the idle condition If the sensor is expecting a stronger idle bias then that coul
324. w MODEM configuration f Once you are done press OK Xpert will configure each com port If you have sensors connected to the Xpert you will want to test them to make sure they are operating properly To test them do the following a Turn recording ON This causes the system to fully activate the I O modules b Select the View Channels tab You will see a list of all the sensors connected to the system the channel module assignments and the last measured value c Select each sensor and press the measure button Verify that the new value displayed is correct d If you have SDI 12 sensors you may also want to press the SDI button Then issue commands to the SDI 12 sensors to configure them or test their operation Check to make sure Recording is ON If you had to go into the setup to make changes there is a chance that the recording is OFF ro mono so Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 17 Select the Log tab Select the desired log file and verify that the data is being stored there as desired 18 Select the Status tab Look for any errors that may be reported in the status box 19 Finally go to the MAIN tab and click LOG OUT 120 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com USING COM PORTS Overview The Xpert has four RS232 COM ports Optio
325. w sutron com Reboot The reboot option may be used to gracefully shutdown the unit and reboot it This is always preferred over just removing power For instance the system will startup much quicker if the log files have been closed out normally and don t need to be rescanned FireWalls If you have Windows Firewall enabled like most PCs do these days you will need to add an exception for Xterm exe in order for it to support all of its networking features If you use a different type of firewall you may need to add an explicit access rule for some of the following service ports that are used by Xterm or the Xpert HOSTED SERVICE PORT PROTOCOL BY DESCRIPTION GUI 52732 TCP Xpert Used by Xterm to perform and log dumps and detect that Xterm the Xpert application is running Xterm also hosts this port in order to support proxy connections Serial and Telnet connections make use of Xterm s proxy REMOTE 52733 ICP Remote Used by Xterm to access and GUI screens and perform Xterm file transfers Xterm also hosts this port in order to support proxy connections Serial and Telnet connections make use of Xterm s proxy AUTO DETECT 52733 UDP Remote Used by Xterm to detect Xperts running on the network SSP 52734 TCP Xpert Used by Remote when it needs to communicate with the Xpert application This port is used locall
326. wait before taking the measurement This wait time allows the module to settle in order to make an accurate measurement Solar Radiation Analog 1 0 Module f f Channel 3 Cancel Units w m2 le Calibration f E Ll Warmup ms 100 Normal Gain Hi Gain x128 Gain With the exception of the 5600 0604 the Hi Gain setting is typically used for solar radiation sensors Itis possible to use the x128 setting if the expected range of irradiance is low enough to ensure that the output voltage will be less than 19 mV but due to the high resolution of the analog to digital converters used there is rarely a need for the x128 range Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When using Hi Gain the input voltage should be less than 312mV when using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module and less than 78mV when using the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module When using x128 Gain the input voltage should be less than 39mV when using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module and less than 19mV when using the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module See the table below for the voltage ranges of Sutron Solar Radiation sensors A check y in a gain column means the selected gain is appropriate for that sensor An x in a gain column means the selected gain is not appropriate for that sensor Part Number Max Output Normal Gain H
327. was found and what is expected If this happens simply copy the correct version of dll sll onto the flash disk and re boot the unit 258 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix C I O Modules 259 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ANALOG I O MODULE 8080 0003 The Analog I O Module ADC has six analog I O lines an output that can be switched to ground and switched and unswitched 12 volt outputs The analog lines are capable of being inputs and outputs simultaneously giving the user tremendous flexibility in setup As an example the simple resistance measurement is made by exciting the input the resistor is connected to and measuring the current and voltage on that input line just as would be done using a conventional multimeter Features e Six inputs configurable as 6 single ended channels or 3 differential inputs or a combination of single ended and differential inputs All channels feature self excitation and built in voltage current and resistance sensing Input gain settings 1 16 Up to 6 4 20ma sensor interface 24 bit analog to digital converter Continuous self calibration Vout excitation return for maximum common mode rejection of bridge sensors One switched battery sensor power output Industrial temperature range oper
328. when Concurrent is not selected SDI Aquatrak SDI Address lo v ia Retry Delay ms 2000 feil a Concurrent Cmd M Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SE8500 SE8500 Inputs lt none gt Outputs Output Wiring The SE8500 can connect to any of the Xpert serial ports The SE8500 wires to the 6461 1239 termination board as follows Color Name Pin 6461 1239 Red 12 6 BLK GND 5 White TXD 3 Green RXD 2 Description This block measures a SE8500 configured for serial output It can also work with an SE8500 connected to a wireless link The properties allow setting the Com Port range offset address and units NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COMS SSP CL set to none as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it Address specifies which address the SE8500 is set to Typically address is 0 Other valid addresses are 1 9 A F After the value is read from the SE8500 it is scaled as follows Value reading range offset Range is typically 0 01 because the SE8500 multiples its value by 100 before sending it However you can select a different range value if desired SE8500 Properties Com Port coma range ts e Leane Offset oC E Address booo E Units fe l Bringing the Benefits of Real T
329. with the sensor Specify the digital I O module and output channel used to control power to the heater in Htr DIO Mod Chan Specify the analog input channel to which the resistor tap is connected in Htr AIO Chan Use Post cal delay m to specify the number of minutes to extend the calibration cool down period 164 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When Shared Relay is checked the system assumes the relay this HeatFlux block uses to control power to the heater is shared with other HeatFlux blocks There may be only one shared relay When Shared Relay is not checked then the system assumes the relay for this block is not shared Note when sharing a relay make sure the measurement schedules and Interval and Duration properties are set the same for all HeatFlux blocks sharing the relay 165 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Internal Battery IntBat Inputs lt none gt Outputs Battery Temp Wiring None the sensors are internal to the Xpert Description This block measures supply voltage and internal temperature The temperature measurement is accurate to within 3 deg Celsius Note the temperature measurement is that of the internal PC board not air temperature Internal Bat and Temp O
330. x A for details on settings SAT RND Checkbox enables Random transmissions for this sensor Clicking the RND box will bring up additional properties see Random Parameter block in Appendix A for details on settings SAT TRG Checkbox enables this sensor to trigger random transmissions Clicking the TRG box will bring up additional properties see Random Group block in Appendix A for details on settings COM TAG Checkbox enables this sensor for Coms SSP CL Clicking the TAG box will bring up additional properties see Coms Tag block in Appendix A for details on settings COM ALM Checkbox enables this sensor for alarms via Coms SSP CL e g modem LOS etc Clicking the ALM box will bring up additional properties see Coms Tag block in Appendix A for details on settings VALUE The Value box shows the last measured value for the sensor Press the value button to take a reading immediately and display it Editing the value by pressing will modify the Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Offset such that future readings will equal the entered value Simply set the offset back to 0 to undo this RT DIGITS Sets the number of right digits used when displaying and logging the sensor SLOPE OFFSET The current slope and offset assigned to the sensor MODULE CHANNEL PORT ADDR These settings mirror those found in the sensor configuration
331. y by the Xpert and there s no reason to open the port on the PC or ina firewall Doing so may create a security risk TELNET 23 TCP Remote Used to support telnet based command line or GUI access screens and file transfer WEB 80 TCP Xpert Used by the Xpert s web Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SERVICE PORT PROTOCOL BY DESCRIPTION and server and Xterm s proxy Xterm web server Configuring the PC modem for use with Xterm Most PC modems will work with Xterm without any additional configuration needed simply select the com port the modem is using from the com port drop down box select the hardware type as modem and set the baud rate if needed and enter the phone number If Xterm gives this dialog AN Unable to open the COM port Please make sure it s not in use by another application Then check to make sure no other program is using the modem and that the correct com port is selected If Xterm gives this dialog A Unable to dial the XPert Please check phone number and modem connection First check that the phone number has been entered correctly enter 1 and area code if needed Then use Hyperterminal or other terminal program and connect to the com port the modem is on Issue an AT amp F command and see OK if you do not see
332. y also be enabled by certain SLLs or Basic Programs A timeout period may be selected for the user to determine how much time with no activity must pass in order to automatically log out the user Starting with Xpert v3 2 Access Rights may also be assigned These allow the user to be restricted to accessing only the Command Line TCP IP SSP or GUI capabilities of the unit depending upon what s checked For example if you wish to access the GUI via Xterm over a network you d enable GUI and TCP IP If you wish to access the command line via telnet over the network you d enable Command Line and TCP IP If you want to permit automatic data collection from XConnect you d need to enable SSP and perhaps TCP IP If you wish to place the Xpert on a public network such as the internet it s recommended that additional security be utilized such as an external VPN Firewall virtual private network that would provide encrypted and secure communications User Name Susan fl Password p aa Confirm Sa User Group Retrieval x Access Rights Command Line SSP M TCP IP GUI Timeout p mir z 7 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SENSORS TAB The Sensors tab shows all the sensors that have been added to the system the sensor addresses the last data value sampled from each sensor and the quality of these last samp
333. y any sensors it finds A count of the number of sensors found will be displayed as the operation progresses The find may take ten seconds to run as there are over sixty SDI 12 addresses to check When the unit finds a sensor it will issue the I identification command and show the results of the I command in the command history text box When more than one SDI port is available e g when using the optional SLL RS485SDI sll the window contains a Port button that can be used to select the active SDI port When exiting the SDI window the software will prompt to see if Recording should be restarted if it was stopped on entry Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DATA TAB The Data tab shows all the data values in the Xpert that have been tagged with either a Coms Tag or FieldVar setup block If this window is empty it means that neither Coms Tags nor FieldVars were used in the setup The data in this window are the values that will be transmitted in response to a request for current data If the data results from a Coms Tag and the tag block is connected to an Alarm block the Alarm status will show up under the column labeled Alarm This window provides three controls Refresh Measure and Change Refresh updates the window with the latest information When the current selection is a Coms Tag Measure causes the system to make a liv

Xpert2 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents